EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C DPDS3-PB-200005D DPDS3-PB-200005E Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2 PDS 7.3 PDS 8.0 SE Date February 2003 February 2003 October 2004 November 2005 Pages 1-594 595-643 644-679 Cover/Notice

Copyright
Copyright © 1984-2005 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.2277013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

_ _______________
cond_part .............................................................................................................................. cond_spec ............................................................................................................................. drawing ................................................................................................................................. drawing_type ........................................................................................................................ drop_point ............................................................................................................................. duct_spec .............................................................................................................................. ee_cond_x_area .................................................................................................................... ee_graphic_only .................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_code ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_color ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_config ...................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ........................................................................................................................ ee_pcbl_size .......................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .......................................................................................................................... ee_pseudo_cable ................................................................................................................... ee_system .............................................................................................................................. ee_units ................................................................................................................................. ee_unique .............................................................................................................................. ee_yes_no ............................................................................................................................. envelope ................................................................................................................................ light_fixture .......................................................................................................................... manual_part .......................................................................................................................... mscatalog .............................................................................................................................. mscodelist ............................................................................................................................. mscolumns ............................................................................................................................ ol_type .................................................................................................................................. one_line ................................................................................................................................. panel ...................................................................................................................................... project ................................................................................................................................... pullbox .................................................................................................................................. rcp ......................................................................................................................................... rcp_type ................................................................................................................................ tl_fit_env ............................................................................................................................... tl_qual ................................................................................................................................... tl_subtype .............................................................................................................................. tl_type ................................................................................................................................... to_equip ................................................................................................................................ to_support ............................................................................................................................. tray_part ................................................................................................................................ tray_spec ............................................................................................................................... vendor ................................................................................................................................... wway_part ............................................................................................................................. wway_spec ............................................................................................................................ EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description .................................................................... cabsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... cndsch_spec .......................................................................................................................... drawing ................................................................................................................................. drop_point .............................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491

13

................................................................................................................. Available Fittings ................................................................................... straight ................................................................................................. rcp_to_sys ...................................................................................................................................... mscolumns ..............................dat ..................................................................... one_line . panel_to_drw .............................................................................................................. mscatalog .................................................................................................................................................................... EE Nucleus File Structure ............................................................ Appendix F: EE File Structure .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................dat ....... envelope ......................................................................................................................... manager......... report... sys_to_drw ............................................................... fit_to_sys .......................... ee_pseudo_cable ......................................................................dat ..................................................................................................................................... str_to_sys .............................................................................. rcp_to_drw ........................................................................................... rule_chk............................................................................................ EE Raceway File Structure ......................................... Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ...........................................................dat ....................................................................................................................................................................................... eden.... Update Reference Schema ......................................................................._ _______________ duct_fill ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ol_to_sys ..................................................................................dat ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... rcp ......dat ......................................................................................................... Symbol Processor File .................................................................................................................... ee_system ........................................................................................................................ Appendix D: Specification ....................................... project .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Sample .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... to_support ........................................................................ 14 .................. 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications .............................................................................................................................. process...........................................................................................................................................................................unl Files ... panel ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files .................................................... print...................... fitting ...........................................

.... Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager .............................. Appendix I: rway......................................... Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) .................................................................................... Drop Table Form .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Associated Software/Files .......................................................... 15 ...................................................... Information Output: ............................................................................................... Set Form ....................................... Appendix J: Reports ........................................................................... Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ............................................................................................. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) ............................................................................................................................................................_ _______________ Appendix H: alias....................................................................................................... Information Output: .................. Project Drawing List (drwlst) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Information Output: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Schema File Form ............................................................................................................................................. Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) .................................................................................................................................................................................................... Alter Table Form ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Information Output: ....................................................................................................................................................................... Create Schema Form ... Create Table Form ..................... Associated Software/Files ............................................................................................ Associated Software/Files ............................. Drop Schema Form ...................................................... Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Information Output: .................................................................................................... Alter Schema Form ................................................cmd ............... Associated Software/Files ................................cmd file ................................................. Associated Software/Files ..... Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) ...................... Data Definition Form ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Table Information Form ............................................................................................................................. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .......................... RIS Report Processing .............................

....... 16 .................................................................................... EE Manager ...................................................................... Database Edit Functions ........................... Glossary ...................................................._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ................................................................................................ Index .............................. 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix N: EE Configure ......................................................................................................................................................

intergraph. Our web address is: http://www._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast.com.com/ppo/services/support. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. If you are outside the United States. 17 . Alabama 35758 U.A.asp. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison. services.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www. and direction. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph. convenient. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U.com. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated.intergraph.com. please call your local Intergraph office. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products. If you are outside of the United States.S. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.S.S. please call your local Intergraph office.

let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed. AL 35758 18 ._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media.

numbered sections._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. 19 . Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. Also. a glossary. Oracle. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function. This document is designed as a reference. Currently. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. and an index. modify. and Ingres. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. such as vi or EMACS. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. appendices. these include Informix. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. grouped according to function. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. you should be familiar with a text editor.

Describe the product environment. For a fixes release.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Provides installation instructions. forms. File Name readme. This includes information on the screen display. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative. Provides special notices to the customer. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. 20 . menus. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. For international locations. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Describes the graphics environment for the product. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and on-line Help. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups.

The text is placed in the viewing plane.rpt file. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. parameter name. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. Key in original. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. which requires an action be taken by the user. Bold Indicates a command name. or groups of related information. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. For example. or dialog box title. For example. For example. 21 . The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. For example. For example. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names.dat to load the ASCII file. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. phrases. which is an explanation of what the software is doing. Choose File > Open to load a new file. The ASCII report is stored in the layout._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases.

Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. 22 . Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. which map menu selections to key combinations.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. then K._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. To press the Escape key.

In a dialog box. you would select items to define parameters.dat to load it into the new surface. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. For example. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. Click Apply to save the changes. For example. For example. Select the line string to define the graphic template. In addition. After selecting an item. Select the file original.dat from the list box. right-button chord. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. Selecting does not initiate an action. you click the action you want to affect the item. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. To key a character string into a text box. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. For example. If you are using the Windows NT operating system._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. such as selecting toggle buttons. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. Double-click on the file original. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor.

February 2003 24 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes._ _______________ 1. Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. 25 . Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. Introduction 1. modify. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide.

February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .

You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . such as vi. all projects have been archived. If you are updating. or Notepad. 2. and EE Raceway Modeling. EMACS. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. Oracle. The software covered includes baseline and application software. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software._ _______________ 2. On-line Informix. or Ingres. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. You must be familiar with a text editor.

February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation. you should load system nucleus software. and the server-client workstation. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. Additionally. you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. followed by the EE application products. For the purposes of this installation. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. A database can reside locally on each workstation. First. the workstation as server. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server. Based on these two setups. or remotely on a server. 28 . it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation.

2. First. and serial number (as delivered). 29 . Double-click on setup. This may be a networked drive. 4. including a valid serial number. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. Download/Install 3. based on your system configuration. This form expects your user name._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS. 1. or it may be on your local system. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form. This will invoke the product selection form. Installation Procedure 2. company. Once you know what application software you need. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. or server). select Load Components. select OK. When all software to be loaded has been selected. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. Place an X next to the software you wish to install.) If client is selected.February 2003 5. Among other installation options that vary according to product. If server is selected. A message box will appear. as well as path to the software on the server. you must provide the installation path. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. 30 . If local is selected. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path.) When all information has been provided. client.

cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. This program group contains the EE Manager.) 7. otherwise select No. EE Configure. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. you must set the environment variables in your ee. Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software.cfg file.txt. Download/Install 8. Set your user environment variables. When the software has successfully loaded. (Your login directory will be fine. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 . 6. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. EE Readme. Before you can enter the EE environment. 2. and EE Nucleus icons. EE Help. 9. Before executing the software. Copy the ee._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. and not to a previously-selected file. you will modify this copied file. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 32 .cfg file. To modify the value of that variable. then select Set. This will close the EE Configure utility. and no more changes are needed. select OK to save the modifications to the ee. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. key the desired value into the Value field.February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. This displays the current value and description for that variable.

Also. 4. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. Download/Install 33 . 1. 2. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. What follows is a very basic outline. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. and 202 for reference schema. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. 3. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Create empty RIS schemas. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product. Also. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. Databases 2. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 5. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide. The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas. 34 . Update your project and reference schemas.

35 . Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. All EE drawings are organized by project. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create._ _______________ 3. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. When you key in EE. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. the Project Menu displays: 3. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions.

control the EE form. The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list. To turn off an active option. and then to select. These options can display additional forms or menus. To edit information you key in to input fields.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . use standard EMACS commands. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you do not know the appropriate addresses. select another option. Listing Area .February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons .displays messages from the software.for keying in or displaying data about a project. or key in. Message Area . check with your system manager.a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area. 36 . Options List .

provide the necessary input. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. 37 . The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. and then select Confirm (√). and executes the active process. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. When a particular option is active. For example. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings. you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. all of the available listings are currently displayed. 3. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. When listings fill more than one page. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option.

Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes. if there are more than one. Delete — Deletes EE project files. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects. 38 . Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation.

Select Confirm (√) to create the project. and key in the new project name. A . Select Create from the Project Menu option list. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. Create 3. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. page 553 . 2. 39 . so you are not required to key in this extension. EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters. Select the Project name field. Steps 1. Multiple files can exist within a single project.prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). which itself can span multiple products. For information about creating a project schema. 3._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. see RIS Schema Manager.

You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. and the schema passwords. You may also key project names into this field. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. 40 . if one has been defined. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. the project and reference schemas. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. if they exist. You will need to input the names of the project. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered.

EE Environment 41 . and key in the password. The project listing displays. leave these fields blank. 2. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. You can make modifications to these fields. page 553 . Select a project from the listing area. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. For information about schema passwords. if needed. The EE Product Menu displays._ _______________ Steps 1. and key in a project name. Identify the appropriate Schema password field. 4. Select Confirm (√). 3. 3. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. — OR — Select the Project name field. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. see RIS Schema Manager. If no password was defined for the schemas.

only the EE Raceway product is on menu. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu. then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. The Design Menu displays. Steps 1. In this example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. available for use. If only one EE product exists on your workstation.) 42 .February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation.

2. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. 43 . You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. Select the Copy project to input field. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field._ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. and key in a project to be copied. and key in the new project name. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. 3. 4. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. 3. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. EE Environment Steps 1.

44 . a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If a database exists in the project directory. Select Confirm (√). Steps 1. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. 3.February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project. 2. and key in the project name. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select the project name from the listing area.

while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. 3. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. For information about dropping a schema. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. 45 . page 553 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. see RIS Schema Manager. If a database does not exist in the project directory.

The project name is appended to this path. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. 46 . Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The path must exist on the remote node.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk.

(If you need more information about the . 2. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list.EErc file. 3. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. and key in a project name. contact your system administrator._ _______________ Steps 1. user name. EE Environment 47 . and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . Select the Project name from the scrolling area. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. 4. and EE_REMDIR. EE_USERNAME. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information.EErc file. Archive 3. — OR — Select the Project name field. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. Default values for the remote node name. Select the storage facility for your project files.) When archiving using a floppy disk.

February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. 48 . you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. When restoring from a network. When restoring from a floppy. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. A password is required if you use the TCP option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

3. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. Restore 3. When restoring from a floppy disk. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. EE Environment 49 . Indicate the storage location for your project. 2. you must have the disk in the disk drive._ _______________ Steps 1. 4. Select the Project name field. and key in a project name. Select Restore from the Project Menu. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle.

February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes. RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.

51 . you must have an existing database and user name. 2. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. Before using this utility. Steps 1. drop._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. For more information. With this utility you can create. Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu. page 553 . To access the RIS Schema Manager form. RIS Schema Manager. and maintain project and reference database schemas. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. see RIS Schema Manager. RIS schema utilities 3. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager.

You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. To enter the password. For additional information about updating schemas. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. Schema password — Defines the schema password. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. page 425 . though doing so will slow processing time. To display the schema password input. see EE Databases. 52 . if one exists. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. To enter the schema name. You can update the schema with multiple products. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. set the toggle to Echo.

3.EErc file. EE Environment 1. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. Set up the form to meet your specifications. 4. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. and key in the desired filenames. see Process. page 64 . or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. and key in the full pathname for those files.. select the field. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application.. 53 . To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). The Update project schema form displays: 2. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . When Update project schema finishes processing. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. The update process displays the message Processing . For more information about operating modes.EErc file.msg). or Batch. it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. Return to step 1.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Update Project Schema Steps 3. To change the displayed default files. Background._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox.

February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. the system displays an error message file (create_db. using the Output option on the Utilities form. 5. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form. 54 . For more information. 6. page 89 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also access these message files. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form.err). see Output.

Background. Schema password — Define the schema password. select the field. and key in the full pathname for those files. For additional information about updating schemas. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. You can update the schema with multiple products. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. To display the schema password input. page 425 . Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. see Process. To change the displayed default files. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. and key in the desired filenames. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema.EErc file. select the field. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. 3. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. page 64 . or Batch. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. To enter information._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. EE Environment 55 . though doing so will slow processing time. To enter information. select the field. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. see EE Databases. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . if one exists. For more information about operating modes. set the toggle to Echo.EErc file. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema.

err).. Return to step 1. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema. The Update reference schema form displays.. The update process displays the message Processing . When Update reference schema finishes processing. it will display one of two message files. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — If the schema is updated without errors. — OR — — If errors occur during the update process.February 2003 Steps 1. 2. 4. Set up the form to meet your specifications. 56 .msg). the system displays an error message file (create_db.

page 89 . 3. located in the current project’s /tmp directory. using the Output option on the Utilities form. 5. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form._ _______________ Update Reference Schema You can also access these message files. For more information. EE Environment 57 . 6. see Output. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 58 .

If you are a new user. you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options. EERWAY Environment The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. 59 . if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu. Commands The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu._ _______________ 4. 4. one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu. page 42 for more information). — OR — Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment The EE Raceway Design Menu. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . rule. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design. 60 . EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. report. and message files.February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus.

The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. it is displayed as the default. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. Select Create from the Design Menu. EERWAY Environment Steps 1. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and. based on a specified seed file. By default. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment. Create When you create a drawing. 4. Select the seed file. the listing area displays all these files. 61 . If there is only one seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. a file extension._ _______________ Create This option creates design files.dgn).dgn) and English seed file (seed. You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. 2. the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. If there is more than one seed file available. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed. you are actually copying a seed file (a template). optionally.

4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Confirm (√). The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension.February 2003 A file extension of . 62 . The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing.

— OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process. Design Steps 1. 2. Select Confirm (√). taking you into a specified existing design file. Select the drawing name from the listing area. The system invokes the graphics environment. EERWAY Environment 63 . 4. Select Design from the Design Menu._ _______________ Design This option accesses the graphics environment. 3.

See Raceway Processes. 64 . These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.February 2003 Process This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. page 331 for more information about individual processes.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. Overview This section provides general information about running all processes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

4. A process in Background runs immediately. For example. if you enter a*. an input screen displays. is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. In other words. A process in Foreground runs immediately. you regain control immediately. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start._ _______________ When you enter a specific process. and you do not regain control until the process is finished. Once you have entered all necessary information. but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. select Confirm (√) to execute the process. when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field. After providing this information. Operating Modes The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. An asterisk (*). EERWAY Environment 65 . and you regain control immediately. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. The default mode is Foreground. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You can override default values by keying in your own information. Process You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area.

Optionally. If you input no date. otherwise. and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. The system also recognizes the names NOON. Select Process from the Design Menu. The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. 3. Select a process from the listing area. 2. 2 or 4 digits. an input box displays.and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours.February 2003 Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select Batch mode. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). four digits to be hours and minutes. the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. NOW and NEXT. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday Steps 1. MIDNIGHT. 66 . One. The time can be entered as 1.

and special parts. EERWAY Environment 67 ._ _______________ EDEN The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. EDEN Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights. This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden. see Eden Processes. fittings. For detailed information about individual Eden options.dat file. page 347 . 4.

The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. you can override the default values that already display. and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. An option in foreground mode runs immediately. You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. background. After providing this information. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground. Operating Modes A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. 68 . The default mode is foreground. If necessary. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. select Confirm (√) to begin the option process. and you regain control immediately. In other words._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in your own information. you regain control immediately. An option in background mode runs immediately. an input screen displays. you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running.February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)). Once you have entered all necessary information. and batch.

If you input no date. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). it will run the job TOMORROW. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. four digits to be hours and minutes. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. otherwise. 2 or 4 digits. an input box displays. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters).and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. One. The special names NOON. MIDNIGHT. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. EERWAY Environment 69 . allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. it will run the job TODAY. NOW and NEXT are also recognized.

70 . These reports report on the project and reference databases.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). You must load the project database before running any reports. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Reports. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports.

3. select the output file box and key in a new name. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Select a report from the listing area. You should give each report you want to save a unique name._ _______________ When you process a report. Steps 1.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. 4. the new file will overwrite that file. EERWAY Environment 71 . you should name the output files yourself. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. To change the output filename. an input screen displays. Select Report from the Design Menu. You can change the name of the output file or error file. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. 2. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in.

and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. 72 . For instance.

page 545 . For more detailed information about each rule check. EERWAY Environment 73 .dat file in win32app\eerway\data._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks. 4. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. see Reports. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.

Select a rule check report from the listing area. Steps 1. you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. Select Rule from the Design Menu.February 2003 When you process a rule check. 3. If you want to save reports throughout a project. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. 2. or change that information according to your specifications._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 74 . Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. an input screen displays. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. the new file will destroy the previously created file.

EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns. Each column will list a different subdirectory. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project. 4. When you select Utilities from the Design Menu. 75 . the Drawing Utility Menu displays.

Send — Sends a file to a network node.All files output by Raceway processes. 76 . Rename — Renames a file.dgn) . Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). 3. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. Copy — Copies a file. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. screen. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .All report files generated by rule checks reports.rpt) . and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. 2. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. Steps 1. and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option.All drawings. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging).February 2003 Drawing (.All report files generated by standard reports. Select Utilities from the Design Menu.chk) . (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. or plotter. (<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.tmp) . Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file. Enter necessary form information for the active option. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types.

— OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. EERWAY Environment 77 ._ _______________ 4. Utilities 4. Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . . or key in the name of the file to be copied. 78 .dgn. Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called. and so forth) to the new file.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. elect a file from the list. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied.rpt. key in a unique destination file name into this field. You must specify a unique filename for the destination file. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (.

but can be undeleted (that is. Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space. you must select the Purge option. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them. EERWAY Environment 79 . To physically remove the file from the workstation._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. 4.

80 . you cannot undelete them with this option. Once you have removed files using Purge._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete.

When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. or no files at all. 4. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. you cannot recover it. Once you Purge a file. EERWAY Environment 81 . Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. place a data point on it._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. selected files that have been deleted. To de-select a selected file.

Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file. 82 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . . You can select the file from the list. and so forth) to the new filename.rpt.dgn. Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename. or key the name into this field. It does not automatically append a file extension (.February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file.

4. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle.dgn). If you are sending a design file to a VAX. test1. the setting should be No IGDS. The password may or may not be visible in the field. or key in the appropriate name. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. Otherwise. EERWAY Environment 83 . Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX. You can either select the desired file from the list. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. turn on the IGDS toggle. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system.

The password may or may not be visible in the field. or key in the appropriate name. including its extension. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Also. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can either select the desired file from the list. 84 . Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. specify the local path to the file. Be sure to specify the complete filename. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle.

chk._ _______________ Local path (dgn. Receive 4. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. rpt. EERWAY Environment 85 .

Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. page 46 . Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. see the description of Archive in Archive. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. 86 .

For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. see the description of Restore in Restore._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. Restore Field Descriptions 4. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. page 48 . Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored. 87 .

88 . Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine.February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle.

for example – are not allowed. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements.dat) controls the available output options._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device. plotter. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection. or select it from the list. screen. Local commands. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. If you do not specify an output destination. Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. NQS options. or laser printer. Field Descriptions 4. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. 89 . IPLOT commands.

February 2003 90 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. data button <D>. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. By default. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. 5. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. EERWAY Graphics 91 ._ _______________ 5. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document.

page 63 ). the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views.February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design. Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 92 . Initializes RIS with the reference schema.

MicroStation Command Window .contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5.cmds file. When the correct item highlights. 93 ._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. release the data button.displays a list of window actions. as described in the previous section. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file. your screen display may be different. To select an action. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button .) 1. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list.

displays elements as you place them. All your design work occurs in the screen working area. The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. — Command Status Field . Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes.displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard. 2.contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment. — System Prompt Field . 3.displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. — Key-In Field . — Current Command Field . Working Area ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type.displays startup file information and product name. 4.provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design. Windows . Command Menu Bar . 94 .February 2003 — Sink Box .displays the name of the current active command.

appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Move Arrows . Double-clicking on this button deletes the window.enlarges a window to its maximum size.provide ways to move and resize windows.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer.displays a list of window actions.provide ways to manipulate windows. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor.appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. To select an action from the menu. press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. Close .collapses a window. Horizontal Arrows . release the data button. Lower .collapses a window. If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.moves a window around the workspace.appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border. Resize Borders . EERWAY Graphics 95 . When the correct item highlights. Vertical Arrows . Minimize .restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Move . the window is restored to its previous size and location.appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. Maximize . Press and hold the data button to move the window. the window is restored to its previous size and location.deletes a window. Window Menu Button . Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Restore . Diagonal Arrows . Minimize Button . If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size. Maximize Button .enlarges a window to its maximum size. Screen Display 5. Size . Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner.

Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword. To select a keyword.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command. Bar Commands . and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. 96 .Removes all palettes that have been invoked. Remove Palettes .Invokes the Integrated Commands menu.Invokes the Bar Commands palette. place the cursor over the button and press <D>. Exit . which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands. Integrated Commands .Invokes the EERWAY command palette. Compress Design .February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Executes the File Design command. For instance._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . when applicable. selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu.

then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 97 . Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. 5.

February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. then selecting Palette. 98 . This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu.

5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. EERWAY Graphics 99 ._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands. 100 . You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. then selecting Palette. 5. EERWAY Graphics 101 .

then selecting Palette.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. 102 . Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window.

the wrong element may highlight. EERWAY Graphics 103 . you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations. or shape you place is called an element. If the correct element highlights. When you are moving an element. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. place a data point on it. In many commands. Identifying Elements 5. The system highlights the element. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. For example._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. To identify an element. press <D> again to accept the element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. press <R> to reject that element. If the wrong element highlights. line. The system then highlights another element.

You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 1 foot) SU — Subunit. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. Subunits. Therefore. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. also known as MU:SU:PU. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. if a user-created cell library is being used. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY.) 104 . we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries. You may set your working units to any desired value.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. the working units of measurement. you can often use data points. you are not limited to using only them. called MU:SU:PU. are established based on the project type (metric or English). The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. and Positional Units. Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. If using this cell library. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library.

direction) To place a precision point. There are several ways to key in precision points. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :. key in DI=0:10.1:6. For example. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed.0. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in DX=1:6.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. 5.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. as described below: DI=(distance._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. For example. EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. 105 .

February 2003 106 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. as an operator would typically use it. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software. page 415 . This includes setting up the design file. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. creating a raceway model. 107 . and running reports and processes on the file._ _______________ 6. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6. Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information.

February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). On the right are the same elements after propagation. EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. In general. These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 .

For additional system manager information. Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command). for example)._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. 109 . Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. specifications.

You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. If you need systems not available to you. page 260 for more information. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. See Set Active System. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. See Set Symbology Control. Then. See Symbology Control. page 262 for more information. You can change the active system throughout the design session. 110 . See Set Active One-Line Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. Then. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. page 294 for more information.February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. you can change the default symbology settings for them. page 295 for more information. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types. See Define System. page 264 for more information. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. See Define One-Line Type. page 258 for more information. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session.

and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. See Propagation Setup. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. 111 . you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. what one-lines will be propagated. As you place one-line segments. you should review the active propagation parameters. Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. page 297 for more information. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 289 for more information. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command.

page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. See Design Commands. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. page 132 . first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. initially in phantom mode. 112 . you can continue placing one-lines. To draw a raceway. Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways).February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. If not accepted. Once you place and accept a run. A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). and the Precision Input form. placing tentative segments. page 119 for more information on these commands. a phantom run disappears._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Place One-Line. using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. When you accept the run. until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. The following figure displays the parts of a run. and Precision Input Form. Place Manual Fitting. regardless of type. page 147 .

page 147 for more information. All special fittings (conduit bodies. First. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. you can define the fitting through Eden. Second. unusual angles. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. use the Propagate command. Eden: In Eden mode. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. for example). the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. For example. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. Sketch: In sketch mode. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. Once found. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. For example. If you require mitred elbows for production. Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. so reference database access is not required. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. see Propagate Element. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. or fitting-to-fitting placement. 113 . extension. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. Propagation 6. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. see Place Manual Fitting. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. page 194 for more information. pullboxes. Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. For example. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible.

definition. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. For a detailed description of these error messages._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. 114 . To highlight errors that occur during propagation. and specification. page 314 . You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63. page 377 . regardless of the active propagation mode. see Highlight Propagation Errors.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit. the one-line elements remain in the design file. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Error Messages. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation.

Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. and title blocks. one-lines. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. Databases 6. Once the project database is loaded. using the annotation forms. The project database is normally created when the project is created. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. one-lines. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database. 115 . For title blocks. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. supplied by the reference database. one-lines. three-lines. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. the default can be unique for each title block cell. For the purposes of this discussion. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. (The system manager may customize these values.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. three-lines. and title blocks. page 178 ). three-lines. The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. The default annotation information. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing.

etc. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .) are stored. A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. 116 . a distinction is now made between schema and database. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database. three-lines.

page 545 . there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. For more detailed information about the individual reports. 117 ._ _______________ Reports Reports 6. These reports run on the project and reference databases. Workflow Currently. page 59 for general information about running reports. You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. see Reports. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment.

the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 118 .February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software. page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. However._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . See Create Interference Envelope (default name).

Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. For each command. refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. Precision Input Form 7. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. When you select a command from the menu. See System/Application Manager Information. 119 . Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. the form displays the active command name as its title. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them._ _______________ 7. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design.

It also accepts any information you have entered through the form. Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. 120 . Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. In most cases. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. It can also reset a current command action by one step._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. In most cases. while collapsing the precision input form. The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. To change the displayed working view. select the field. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. Cancel Terminates the active command. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>.

you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. For example. The bottom field displays various precision input messages. For example. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Both options accept key-in for distance._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. 121 . by selecting North and keying in 20. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. Using Move To. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. by selecting North and keying in 20. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Using Move. and direction. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. 7.

Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. lower center. and lower right. 122 .February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Three justification points are available: lower left. By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below.

Precision Input 123 . The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. 2. When you identify a one-line. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. 3._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints. When you select the command. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. Activate the Any Point option. In Construct Point mode. The command highlights the identified segment. you can route segments nonorthogonally. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. 7. and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. If you do select Accept.

February 2003 4. 124 . moving in the direction of the segment. — OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter. and select Accept. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. 5.

you must key in a value by which to extend the run. 7. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. Precision Input 125 . the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. the Full/Half toggle displays. When you select the command. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. When you select the Distance button. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. When you select the Height or Width buttons. When you select the Distance button. or any distance you key in. You cannot use this command to place a first point. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. Using the toggle. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. Using the toggle. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. When you select the Height or Width buttons. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification)._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify.

Steps 1. 126 .Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees. The Distance and Direction form displays.These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined.February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. Angles . The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined. Negative values are acceptable. 2. You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed. Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. 3. Move to .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. Move . Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance . You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point.

— OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. 7. If counterclockwise. If clockwise. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. The default setting is clockwise. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form. modify. 127 . page 287 for more information on the available commands. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. See Runtime Setup Commands. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. 4. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. This option is set in the PDS product. the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees).

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 128 .

Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. drop points. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Design 129 . Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. manual fittings. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. rotate cross sections. circle. change the active design parameters. 8. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. raceway connect points (RCPs). and size conduit and duct banks. and right cylinder._ _______________ 8. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location.

Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill. Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. 130 . These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. See Setup Commands. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command. Likewise. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 131 . Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. For detailed information about precision input. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. page 119 ._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. 8.

The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. one-line type. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. based on every possible combination of routing options. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. you can connect to an existing one-line. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. or when you place a fitting. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. you can resume routing an existing one-line. One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. is new. while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. unattached to another element. or specifications of a one-line. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. and so forth). Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. 132 . Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. you can attach to an existing RCP. then connect will not be an option. These two segments will retain the systems. and annotation of the original one-line. conduit. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. raceway parameters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue.

then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. or continue. You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. Design 133 . then the command places a new RCP by default. If the beginning or termination action is break._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. attach. the command will not allow the continue option. or continue. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. attach. If the beginning or termination action is break. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. though it is not a recommended practice. 8. This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. Data Point Accepts. Select the Place One-Line command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. see Precision Input Form. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. you can locate elements. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. and exit a command. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. 2. 134 . reject input. Complete the routing. Using the form. accept input. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. In addition. page 256 ). page 119. 4. page 287 . At any point during this operating sequence. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. route one-lines. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. prompting you to Enter first data point. 3. and return to step 2.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. circle. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If the RCP has a fitting on it. see Precision Input Form. 135 ._ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. and exit a command. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. At any point during this operating sequence. The arc. circle. such as an elbow. Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. reject input. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. or part of a cell. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. route one-lines. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. If the RCP does not have a fitting. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. accept input. you can locate elements. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. 8.

which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. Select the Route Around Vessel command. The precision input form displays. 5. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. 4. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. the closest. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 136 . the route can be placed to the vessel. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in.February 2003 Steps 1. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. circle. 3. You cannot key in a negative value.

Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel. The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more). Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel. Route Around Vessel 8. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. Design 137 . — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. 7. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel._ _______________ 6.

route one-lines. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. 2. The system highlights a valid one-line. reset a command action. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119.February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. Steps 1. the system displays the message Element not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. 138 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. reject input. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. and exit a command.

Go to Step 2. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. Go to Step 2. If you accept the one-line. Design 139 ._ _______________ 3. Continue inserting RCPs. Insert RCP 8. the command inserts the RCP as specified. 4. the system prompts you to identify another. — OR — Exit the command.

see Set Raceway Defaults. reject input. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays. you can locate elements. but changes the duct bank justification location. page 119. For duct bank cross sections. If you identified a duct bank cross section. Steps 1. Using the form. go to step 4. Select the Rotate Cross Section command. page 256 for more information.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. route one-lines. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. 2. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 140 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Otherwise continue to step 3. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. Design 141 . See Set Raceway Defaults. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. If you do not locate an acceptable element. If Automatic Propagation is on. Data Point Accepts. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle. the system displays the message Element not found. 8. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. Repeat this step. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. 4. 3.

Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. for instance. reset a command action. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. the system displays the message Element not found. For example. You can._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. Using the form.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. a higher number indicates a lesser priority. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. route one-lines. and exit a command. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. 142 . The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. The system highlights a valid RCP. you can locate elements. Steps 1. 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. page 119. Select the Place Drop Point command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If you do not locate an acceptable element.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. and returns you to the previous prompt. The system places the drop point as specified. The system highlights the identified one-line. Go to step 2. Go to step 2. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. Design 143 . Go to step 4. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. 4._ _______________ 3. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. Place Drop Point 8. 5. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. — OR — Reject the one-line. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP.

The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. reject input. 3. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. accept input. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. the system displays the message Element not found. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. you can locate elements. Using the form. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The system highlights a valid RCP. 144 .

Select the Define Active Point command._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. and exits the command. 2. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. 145 . accept input. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. you can locate elements. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Steps 8. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. The command makes the specified data point the active point. Design 1. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input.

At any point during this operating sequence. 146 . For detailed information about precision input. active systems. Steps 1. Using the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. one-line type. see Precision Input Form. system. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Set Active Parameters command. The system highlights the identified element. Return to step 2. The command exits automatically. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. route one-lines. 3. and exit a command. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. The system sets the active one-line type. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. and raceway parameters. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. 2. page 119. accept input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

_ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. or fitting-to-fitting placement. During placement. Otherwise. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. then the system places the new fitting by itself. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. and so forth) using this command. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. pullboxes. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. unusual angles. Design 147 . the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. When placing a straight section. vertical tees. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. For example. Place Manual Fitting 8.

rigid. page 294 . 148 . wye. the previous orientation will be retained. etc. page 295 . See Define Active Point. To change the displayed qualifier. one-line type.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. select a value from the list. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. the command derives the orientation from the place point. See Set Active System. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select a value from the list. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. page 145 . Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form. Otherwise.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. and active one-line type parameters in the design. straight. page 146 . If manual placement cannot locate a fitting. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. See Set Active Parameters. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. etc. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. inside vertical. select a value from the list. See Set Active One-Line Type. etc.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. horizontal.) for that specification. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. To change the displayed three-line type. To change the displayed subtype.

The list contains available angles. To display the specification itself. key in a negative angle. or Angle (if applicable). To change the displayed part. select a value from the list. and key in the new value. Spec1. To change the displayed angle. and key in the new value. Subtype. If straight is not your active Type. 8. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. Design 149 . select the field. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. To change the displayed length. Doing so displays a specification form. and Qualifier. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. select the corresponding Display button. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. (if applicable) Spec2. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. select a value from the list. select an angle from the list or select the field. To change the displayed specification. Subtype. Part — Displays the active part. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. Subtype. The list contains all available specifications._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. and Qualifier for the current specification. You can only review the values in this field. the Length field does not display on the form. Qualifier.

then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. To change the active placepoint._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. If only one row matches this criteria. page 178 . select the Override button. Clear . List . then the column value has an associated codelist. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. You can only review the information in this column. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. Select . containing all matching rows. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings.February 2003 Column name . If more than one row matches the criteria. then a second form. See Spec1 for a description of the form. You can review and modify the values in this column. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. To display the codelist. To change a value. displays. If Cutback Mode is off.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. If an * displays in the List column. Override .Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. if any. and Qualifier. see Annotate Element.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. Type. select the slide bar. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Subtype. for the given Spec1. 150 . and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. which automatically activates it. Doing so displays a specification form.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). If Cutback Mode is on. the RCP will be moved accordingly. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. Column value . and key in a new value. For a list of valid operators. the existing RCP location is fixed. select the *. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Then select the field.

Secondary. Design 151 . and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. select the field. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. the Place Manual Fitting form displays.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. then the largest fitting available is used. To change the displayed axis. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. select the field. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with. About . — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. and key in a new value. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. then that fitting is used. Angle . It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. To change the displayed angle. Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. 8. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. and toggle between the three axes (Primary.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

material. For example. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. you set the active Table to cond_body. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. made of feraloy from vendor 3. When set to All. if you set material to feraloy. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. To change the active special part table. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. if you set type to form 7c. and vendor to 3. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. select a table name from the list.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. and vendor display as the active attributes. 152 . will be displayed in the size list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. see the descriptions earlier in this section. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. vendor to 3. In other words. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. Similarly. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. type. and size to 1/2 inch. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. size. regardless of the other attribute settings. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. material to feraloy.

Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. Change fitting descriptions. 153 . set the toggle to Driven By Table. Design Steps 1. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. 4. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. Select the Place Manual Fitting command._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. page 119 . Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. orientations. Go to step 4. you should first consider a few points. 2.) to construct the three-line symbols. and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. see Precision Input Form. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. For more information. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. Such fittings are called special parts. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. height. orientation. 3. etc. radius. On the other hand. and location.

— OR — Exit the command.February 2003 5. 154 . Continue placing manual fittings._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation. Design 155 . Conduit Sizing 8.

The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. To display the code list. then the Value has an associated code list. select the *. 156 . You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. If you do not enter another operator. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias. This operator is a wild card. representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. If an * displays in the column. representing a single character. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value.

Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units. the PseudoCable form displays. Design 157 . Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. — Increase/Decrease size . Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. 8. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there.When a conduit is calculated to be full. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. it is added to the conduit. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY . the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. If more than one cable matches the search criteria.

You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 158 . and exit a command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 4. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. Steps 1. reset a command action. Using the form. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Define the cables for the conduit. see Precision Input Form. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. 2.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. 3. page 119. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Conduit Sizing command. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. reject input. page 268 for more information. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

a warning message displays. Field Descriptions 8. Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation._ _______________ 5. Design 159 .

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. To move an inserted vertex. page 119. accept input. The selected one-line highlights. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 3. 160 . The vertex is inserted. see Move One-Line Vertex. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. 2. Steps 1. reject input. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. If Automatic Propagation is on. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. route one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. page 192 for more information. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section. see Precision Input Form.

Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. Similarly. This field is informational only. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. field route length. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. select the field and key in the new value. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. To change the displayed length. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. select the field and key in a new length. Place Field Routed Raceway 8.) When set to Keyin. the value is displayed in the design. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema. there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. When on. 161 . For example. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. To change the value.

and key in a new value. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. select the field. select the field. and exit a command. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. y. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. accept input. To change the displayed length. you are prompted for the first point (that is. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and key in a new value. placement point) of the one-line element. page 119. route one-lines. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. sum of the x. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. Using the form.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. To change the displayed axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. 162 . Secondary. select the field. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. reject input. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. To change the displayed angle. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis.

— OR — Exit the command. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. 3. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. Design 163 ._ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The precision input form displays. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. 2.

164 . Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. By assigning a conduit. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. cable or gap to a button. All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you assign that area in the duct bank. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable.

Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. Design 165 . You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. If conduit routing is selected. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. page 256 for more information. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. cable or gap to a matrix button. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. If cable routing is selected. The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. See Set Raceway Defaults. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. 8._ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit.

If Automatic Propagation is on. you can locate elements. both width and height. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. you can define a margin width. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. Steps 1. For detailed information about precision input. Define cross section layout using the various commands. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. is assigned to the duct one-line. accept input. 2. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Likewise. see Precision Input Form. See Set Raceway Defaults.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. Using the form. If you select Cancel on the warning form. The precision input form displays. reject input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 3. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. 166 . page 256 for more information. 4. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. all conduit/cable information. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. route one-lines. page 119. any changes you made will be ignored. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The duct bank section layout. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence.

Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point. You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. page 164 . 8. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. page 268 . material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. page 260 . 167 . page 294 . vendor. See Set Active One-Line Type. See Define One-Line Type. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. units. See Define Duct Cross Section. page 289 .

This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. 168 . this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. conduit/cable) to manipulate. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up.

— OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. — OR — Exit the option. 4. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The Place Stub Up form displays. The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Go to Step 2. 169 . Go to Step 6. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. 3. Steps 8. Go to Step 9. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Select the Change Association option. Select the Select Duct Segment option. Go to Step 14. 5. Go to Step 4. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. The identified element highlights._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. Select the Place Stub Up command. 2.

7. Go to Step 7. The precision input form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 170 . Select stub up for modification. 8. The identified element highlights. propagated elements. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. Go to Step 2. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 12. Select the Change Association option. Go to Step 7. The identified element highlights. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. The precision input form displays. — OR — Exit the option. is displays in the form message field. 9. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. 10. Go to Step 2. It also deletes all cross sections. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 11. Select the Delete Stub Up option.February 2003 6. — OR — Exit the option. Go to Step 10. annotation. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line.

The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. — OR — Select a option button._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. 171 . 15. displays in the message field. Select a button from the Button Matrix. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. Design Go to Step 14. displays in the message field. Go to Step 2. The precision input form displays. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. 14. Go to Step 2. Select location to place stub up. 17. 16. Select the Place Stub Up option. Select location to place stub up. Go to Step 17. 13. Go to Step 2. has been changed. Steps 8. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. Stub up spec. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

deleting. and propagation. Available element manipulations include copying. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. 9. annotating. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. and so forth). three-lines. moving. within the design file. such as RCPs. annotation. These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. and three-lines._ _______________ 9. 173 . Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Palette. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. one-lines.

February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For reliable results. For detailed information about precision input. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. you should use these commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. See Setup Commands. page 119 . 174 . see Precision Input Form. any time you are modifying raceway elements.

to review or edit element annotation. annotation. within the design file. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. You can use individual commands to move. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. three-lines. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. then selecting Palette. Commands Annotate Element — Places. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. including RCPs. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. and three-lines. 9. one-lines. copy. then selecting Modify Element Commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and so forth). Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. and delete specified elements. reviews. 175 . and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements.

176 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. and elements associated with it. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. from the design file. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and so forth). any time you are modifying raceway elements. annotation._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. For detailed information about precision input. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. you should use these commands. 177 . page 119 . you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. not MicroStation manipulation commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. For reliable results. three-lines. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. 9. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. See Setup Commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands.

For straights and fittings. you are allowed only to review the annotation.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. and fittings. By definition. straights. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. reviews. 178 . you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. Using this command. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. three-lines. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database.

however. You can review and modify the values in this field. the value is saved back to user data. 9. If an * displays in the List column. If Dgn displays in the column. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. Once you have deleted the override. where New had displayed. If blanks exist for a field. the corresponding column value comes from user data. Empty <Return>s. then it will display an R._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. the Access column displays a R/W. You can enter blank spaces into the design. the value will display in the design where you place it. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Otherwise. You can only review the Column name column information. Where the toggle is On. Modify 179 . When modified. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. then the value derives from the reference database. select the field. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. enter nothing into the design. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. The next time you enter the annotation form. If you change a column value. To change the values associated with the element. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. You can only review the information in this column. then the value derives from the design file. Where UD displays in the column. it becomes an override key to the reference database. the field remains null. and key in the new value. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. using your keyboard space bar. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. To display the codelist. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. The key field is updated. If Ref displays in the column. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. select the *. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. If you can only view (read) the column value.

Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. which automatically activates it. If you select Cancel (X). From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. select the field. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Otherwise. but cannot delete it. and key in a new value. the Default key is used. Once you place an override key on an element. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. If more than one row matches the criteria. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. To change the displayed value. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). the field remains null. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. and then select Confirm (√). select the row you want. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. you can modify it. 180 . the key specified in the user element is used. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. You can only review the information in this field. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. If no key exists in the user element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. If you do not enter another operator. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. the system assumes =. see Precision Input Form. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. and exit a command. accept input. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. At any point during this operating sequence. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. For detailed information about precision input. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. Using the form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. representing a single character. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. representing zero or more characters. This operator is a wild card. 181 . Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. page 119. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. This operator is a wild card.

Return to Step 2. Select the Annotate Element command. If you do not locate an acceptable element. and place a data point. 6. or RCP)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Position the column value. The system highlights the specified element. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. the system displays the message Element not found. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. return to Step 2. 3. 4. three-line. 2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 5. This step repeats for each new value. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. drop point.February 2003 Steps 1. reset <R> to skip. 182 . — OR — Exit the command. Return to step 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. When there are no more values to place. The new value displays in the design file. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. equipment pointer. The Annotate Element precision input form displays.

optionally. Modify 183 ._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and. these values are loaded into the project database. displayed. Field Descriptions 9. When you annotate any raceway element. When you load the project database. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements.

To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. 184 . reject input.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. page 119._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The Copy Element precision input form displays. 2. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Repeat this step. the system displays the message Element not found. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. Select the Copy Element command. 3. Modify 185 . 9. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. Steps The system highlights the specified element. Return to Step 2. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy._ _______________ Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. and equipment pointers will also be moved. route one-lines. If a one-line is moved. reset a command action. equipment pointers. and annotation. If an RCP is moved. 186 . All associated annotation. At any point during this operating sequence. drop points. You can use this command to move one-lines. reject input. RCPs.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. accept input. page 119. All associated annotation. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. three-line fittings. Using the form. and equipment pointers will also be moved._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input.

2. Steps The system highlights the specified element. The system moves the element to the specified location. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. Repeat this step. Modify 187 . — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. the system displays the message Element not found. 9. Select the Move Element command. The Move Element precision input form displays.

Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. accept input. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. reject input. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. page 119. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. and exit a command. 188 .February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. For detailed information about precision input.

Steps 9. Select the Clone Element command. 4. 2._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Modify 189 . Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element. If you are placing more than one clone. 3. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element. Return to step 2. The element highlights. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element.

At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. accept input. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. 190 . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. the attached RCP will also move. page 119._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Also. reset a command action.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. route one-lines.

page 297 for more information on this toggle. Modify 191 . Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. 2. 3._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. Repeat this step. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. The selected one-line segment highlights. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. Steps 9. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. See Propagation Setup. The system moves the segment to the specified location.

Select the Move One-Line Vertex command. Using the form. along with any annotation. equipment pointers. 192 .February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The selected vertex highlights. 2. accept input. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. page 119. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. the attached RCP. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . reject input. If a one-line end vertex is moved. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. also move with the vertex.

Move One-Line Vertex 9. See Propagation Setup. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Repeat this step._ _______________ 3. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle. Modify 193 .

Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. see Propagation Setup. see Precision Input Form. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To view errors that occur during propagation. page 314 . All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. 194 .February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 297 .err file. For information about the form. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. reject input. page 119. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. For detailed information about precision input. This command displays to the screen the pro. A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exit a command. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. see Highlight Propagation Errors. reset a command action.

Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. Select the Propagate Element command. see Specification. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. Fittings 9._ _______________ Steps 1. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments. page 507 . If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Go to step 1. 2. 3. The Project Run precision input form displays. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. 195 . the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. For information about this table. Go to step 2. — OR — Exit the command. Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. The message disappears when you identify a valid element.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 .

Modify 197 ._ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9.

Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. inside vertical.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. 198 . To change the displayed subtype. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. wye. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. Subtype. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select a value from the list.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. etc. rigid. select an angle from the list or select the field. To change the displayed angle. straight. To change the displayed qualifier. To change the displayed three-line type. and Qualifier for the current specification. horizontal. page 214 . The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow.) for that specification. See Remove RCP. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. select a value from the list. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. You can only review the values in this field. The list contains available angles. and key in the new value. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification. Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. select a value from the list. etc. etc.

To change a value. You can review and modify the values in this column. To display the specification itself. 199 . select the field. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. select a value from the list. Then select the field. — Column value . Qualifier. The list contains all available parts for the current specification. key in a negative angle. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). Spec1. To change the displayed length. To change the displayed part. select the corresponding Display button. select a value from the list. To change the displayed specification. Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name . 9. Subtype. and Qualifier. If straight is not your active Type. and key in a new value. and key in the new value. You can also change any of the values for Type. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. and (if applicable) Spec2. The list contains all available specifications. select the Override button. Subtype. You can only review the information in this column.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. the Length field does not display on the form. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Part — Displays the active part.

Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. — Select . Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. — Override . — Clear . See Spec1 for a description of the form. and Qualifier. If an * displays in the List column. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. If only one row matches this criteria. page 178 . If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Doing so displays a specification form. see Annotate Element. To display the codelist. which automatically activates it. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Type. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. then that fitting is used.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. then the column value has an associated codelist. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. For a list of valid operators. Subtype.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. select the *. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. if any. To change the active placepoint.February 2003 — List . That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If more than one row matches the criteria. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. then the largest fitting available is used. select the slide bar. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . for the given Spec1. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them.

and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. if you set type to form 7c. the form changes. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. and vendor display as the active attributes. To change the displayed axis. and vendor to 3. — About . size. made of feraloy from vendor 3. In other words. and key in a new value. 9. vendor to 3. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. select the field.) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Secondary. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. type.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. if you set material to feraloy. For example. you set the active Table to cond_body. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. material to feraloy. To change the displayed angle._ _______________ — Angle . It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. select a table name from the list. and size to 1/2 inch. will be displayed in the size list. select the field. To change the active special part table. Modify 201 . OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Similarly. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. material.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. To change the active part. height. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. The list contains all available parts from the table.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . page 119 . All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. you should first consider a few points.) to construct the three-line symbols. see the descriptions earlier in this section. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. see Precision Input Form. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . radius. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. On the other hand. When set to All. For more information. regardless of the other attribute settings. etc. select a part from the list. Such fittings are called special parts. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters.

3._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. Select Confirm when finished. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. 2. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. 4. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. set the toggle to Driven By Table. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Modify 203 . Go to step 4. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. Edit the fitting as needed. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9.

The Modify One-Line precision input form displays. Steps 1. the system displays the message Element not found. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. page 119. accept input. the other segment appears as a dashed line. see Precision Input Form. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. The system highlights a valid one-line. Using the form. When identified. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. 2. and exit a command. Select the Modify One-Line command. 204 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The dashed segment will then be modified. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. you can locate elements.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element.

— OR — Reject the element. 5. Modify One-Line 9. 6. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. 4. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. The one-line highlights. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. Go to step 2. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. place a data point on the original one-line. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. Data Point Accepts. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. and return to step 2. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed._ _______________ 3. Repeat this step. Modify 205 . prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. Go to step 2. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. To terminate the new routes. The command prompts you to identify another one-line.

206 . Accept the rotation and return to step 2. — OR — Continue rotating the cross section.February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7.

a LB fitting be placed. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. accept input. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. For detailed information about precision input. You must define the rules in the reference database. you can locate elements. then that fitting is used. Place Fitting by Rule 9. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For example._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. and exit a command. reset a command action. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. then the largest fitting available is used. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. route one-lines. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. 207 . At any point during this operating sequence. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. reject input. see Precision Input Form. See EE Databases. Using the form. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules.

February 2003 Steps 1. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. 2. 208 . If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . displays. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting.

then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. If Invalid. All RCPs must have a system in common. If no coincident RCPs are found._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. then the RCPs can be merged. 209 . If Combinable. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. Steps 1. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. 9. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line.

The RCPs are combined. 4. changes to Kept. Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs. 3.February 2003 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. For each set of coincident RCPs. the one you selected. 210 . and the Status of the remaining RCP.

If no duplicate one-lines are found. 211 . — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted. 9. 5. 4. 2. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. Modify 3. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. Select Cancel when finished. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form.

Select the Delete Element command from the menu. drop points. route one-lines. accept input. equipment pointers. You can use this command to delete one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. The Delete Element precision input form displays. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The system highlights the specified element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Using the form.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. and annotation. reject input. cosmetic graphics. and exit a command. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. see Precision Input Form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 212 . RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. 2. the system displays the message Element not found. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. For detailed information about precision input.

_ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. annotation. It also deletes all cross sections. the system deletes it. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element. Return to Step 2. propagated fittings. 3. 9. Modify 213 . and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion.

At any point during this operating sequence. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. accept input. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Using the form. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If both onelines are annotated. see Precision Input Form. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. Once such an RCP is removed. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. page 119. reject input. 214 .February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. route one-lines. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. For detailed information about precision input.

the system prompts you to identify another. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. Remove RCP 9. Modify 215 ._ _______________ Steps 1. Return to step 2. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. the system displays the message Element not found. 3. If you reject the RCP. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Select the Remove RCP command. If you accept the RCP. 2. Go to Step 2. The system highlights the specified element. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it. Return to step 2. 3.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. This command does not remove the RCP. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 216 . or the fitting’s RCP. to delete. Select the Delete Fitting command.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 217 . Modify Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. Using the form. 9. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. and exit a command. accept input. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. For detailed information about precision input. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. The selected vertex highlights. reject input. see Precision Input Form. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 2. route one-lines. you can locate elements. page 119.

the one-line repropagates. 218 .February 2003 3. The vertex is removed. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one. Return to step 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If Automatic Propagation is on. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. Return to step 2.

If automatic propagation is toggled on. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. Modify 219 . 9._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. At any point during this operating sequence.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. reject input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. the command will repropagate the one-line. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. accept input. you can locate elements. page 119. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. (See Propagation Setup. Using the form.

If you do not locate an acceptable element. Go to step 2. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). The system highlights a valid one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. — OR — Reject the element.February 2003 Steps 1. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Go to step 2. 220 . the system displays the message Element not found. 3. 2. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element.

Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Project Rules cannot be assigned. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. then the Project Rule can be assigned. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. If an * displays in the List column. 9. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. select the *. To clear the Project Rule. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. the system Percent and the Project Rule. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. 221 . select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. When a row is selected.

reset a command action. 2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and exit a command. 5. — OR — Exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The precision input form displays. see Precision Input Form. Select the Change System Parameters command. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. Using the form. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 222 . Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. route one-lines. accept input. reject input. The identified element highlights. 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. For detailed information about precision input. 4. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command.

Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. and to review or edit element annotation. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. Topics 9. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. and delete elements of specified groups. three-lines. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. then selecting Palette. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Annotate Element by Group — Places. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. annotation. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. reviews. and so forth). copy. 223 .

Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group.February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 224 .

you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. you should use these commands. 9. three-lines. For reliable results. Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. and so forth). Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. not MicroStation manipulation commands. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. annotation. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. See Setup Commands. any time you are modifying raceway elements. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). 225 . page 119 . see Precision Input Form. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. For detailed information about precision input. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups. select the group name key-in field. To change the active group. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. and key in a name.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. The active group is highlighted in the list. using the Hilite option. Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. To enter a group name. select a group from the list. If the toggle is set to Single Element. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group. 226 . you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. however. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically. In general. Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list.

_ _______________
To initiate the Create operation, select the button, key in a group name, and select Accept. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). To initiate the Drop operation, select a group from the Available Groups list, select Drop, and then select Accept. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. To initiate the Copy action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Copy, and key in a new group name. Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list.

Define Group

To initiate the Add to operation, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Add to, and then select Accept. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. If you remove all elements from a group, the system automatically drops the entire group. To initiate the Drop from action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, select Drop from, and then select Accept. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. When processing is complete, review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. To initiate the Hilite action, select an existing group from the Available Groups list, and select Hilite. It is not necessary to select Accept. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. Types include one-lines, three-lines, RCPs, drop points, to equipment, and all annotation. You must choose at least one element type when creating, adding elements to, or dropping elements from a group.

9. Modify

227

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems. – One-Line Type - Displays a list of available one-line types.

When you select a one-line type from this list, only those element types (RCPs, onelines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. You can select individual one-line types from this list, or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. – System - Displays a list of available systems.

When you select a system from this list, only those element types (RCPs, one-lines, three-lines, and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. You can select individual systems from this list, or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. Once you have displayed the System list, you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form. – Attributes - Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.

228

_ _______________
When you select an element type from this list, an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. Once you have defined the attributes, select the Accept button on the main form. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes, select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form.

Define Group

Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation, insertion into groups, or deletion from groups. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group. For example, if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group, and select Fence Block from this list, the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place. – Selection - Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – Fence Block - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. – Fence Shape - Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design. – View - Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify. – All Elements - Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design.

9. Modify

229

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Steps
1. Select the Define Group command. The Groups form displays. 2. Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. — Use the EE Element Types, EE Method, and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. — Select the Process button at the top of the form. — Using the Graphic Method you defined, select your elements for the group. The group is created. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form.

— OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. Select one of the group modification commands.

4.

230

_ _______________
Copy Element by Group
This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Copy Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu.

9. Modify

The Copy by Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

231

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Repeat this step. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically. 5. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. Elements within the active group highlight. 6. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. The system copies the element as specified. If there are group elements that remain uncopied, you are returned to step 3. Otherwise, the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. Otherwise, the command exits automatically.

232

_ _______________
Annotate Element by Group
This command places, reviews, and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes, though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines, three-lines, Raceway Connect Points (RCP), straights, and fittings. For straights and fittings, you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). Using this command, you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components.

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Field Descriptions
Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. You can only review the Column name column information. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. You can review and modify the values in this field. To change the values associated with the element, select the field, and key in the new value. You can enter blank spaces into the design, using your keyboard space bar. Empty <Return>s, however, enter nothing into the design. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. To delete an override on a reference database attribute, select the column value field and delete the blank character. Once you have deleted the override, a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null.

233

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If blanks exist for a field, the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value. If Ref displays in the column, then the value derives from the reference database. If Dgn displays in the column, then the value has been defined from the design file. If you change a column value, the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. The next time you enter the annotation form, the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn, where New had displayed. Where UD displays in the column, the corresponding column value comes from user data. When modified, the value is saved back to user data. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If an * displays in the List column, then the column value has a corresponding codelist. To display the codelist, select the *. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value, the Access column displays a R/W. If you can only view (read) the column value, then it will display an R. You can only review the information in this column. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value. Where the toggle is On, the value will display in the design where you place it. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field, it becomes an override key to the reference database. The key field is updated, and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database, an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. If you delete the value in this field, a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. Otherwise, the field remains null. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block, then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line, the key specified in the user element is used. If no key exists in the user element, the Default key is used. Once you place an override key on an element, you can modify it, but cannot delete it. To change the displayed value, select the field, and key in a new value. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. You can only review the information in this field.

234

_ _______________
Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. For example, setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation, the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. Available operators are described later in this section. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide, then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. If more than one row matches the criteria, then a second form containing all matching rows displays.

Annotate Element by Group

From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows, select the row you want, and then select Confirm (√). If you select Cancel (X), the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form, and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button, which automatically activates it.

9. Modify

235

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator, the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing zero or more characters. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card, representing a single character. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value.

>

greater than

numeric

<

less than

numeric

>=

greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to

numeric

<=

numeric

!=

numeric

%

wild card

CHAR

_

underline

CHAR

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command. (For information about the command, see Define Group, page 226 .) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

236

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If there is not a fence in the design, go to step 3. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. The system highlights the group contents. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. The command exits automatically. Go to step 1. 3. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. — OR —

Annotate Element by Group

9. Modify

Reject the highlighted group element. The system highlights another group element. Repeat this step. If no group elements remain, the command exits. 4. 5. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. Go to Step 3. 6. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor.

237

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Position the column value, and place a data point. The new value displays in the design file. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. If you set the toggle to Global, the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. When there are no more values to place for the element type, the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Go to step 3. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single, the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group. Go to step 3. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and, optionally, displayed. When you load the project database, these values are loaded into the project database.

238

_ _______________
Clone Element by Group
This command copies the active group multiple times, useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group.

Clone Element by Group

Before Using This Command
You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form, you can locate elements, route one-lines, accept input, reject input, reset a command action, and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119. At any point during this operating sequence, you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element, press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must define a temporary group of elements, using the Define Group command, see Define Group, page 226. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. A fence group overrides the active group.

Steps
1. Select the Clone Group command.

9. Modify

The Clone Group precision input form displays. If you have not defined a group, the message No active group defined displays. — If you have a fence in the design, go to step 2. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form, go to step 4. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

239

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. 8. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. — OR — Reject the active group. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones.February 2003 3. the command exits automatically. 6. 7. Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. 5. Otherwise. Repeat this step. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. If you are placing more than one clone. The clone elements are placed in the design file. The command exits automatically. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group. Return to step 2. 240 . Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. Go to step 6. 4.

For information about using this command. go to step 2. using the Define Group command. accept input. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. see Propagate Element. page 226. Modify Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Highlight Propagation Errors._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. A fence group overrides the active group. see Define Group.err file. go to step 4. and exit a command. page 297 . which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. page 194 . Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. To view errors that occur during propagation. For information about the form. The Project by Group precision input form displays. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 241 . You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. see Propagation Setup. 9. route one-lines. go to step 3. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. For detailed information about precision input. page 314 . Using the form. This command displays to the screen the pro. — If you have a fence in the design. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. You must define a temporary group of elements. reject input. reset a command action.

The system highlights another group element for propagation. and then highlights another group element for propagation. the command exits automatically. or until you exit the command. If no group elements remain for propagation. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — OR — Reject the active group. The command exits automatically. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. and exits automatically. 4. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. or until you exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. the command exits automatically.February 2003 2. go to step 3. 242 . Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. Go to step 1. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. The system propagates every element belonging to the group. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The system propagates the element. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. If no group elements remain.

Using the form. see Define Group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. See EE Databases. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. reject input. then the largest fitting available is used. then that fitting is used. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 226. 243 . For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. you can locate elements. one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. using the Define Group command. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. and exit a command._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. 9. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. see Precision Input Form. A fence group overrides the active group. You must define the rules in the reference database. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For example. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. If you have not defined a group. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. 244 . If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. go to step 2. go to step 3. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. displays. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — If you have a fence in the design. Otherwise. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. 3. 2. The command exits automatically. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 4. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. the message No active group defined displays. Repeat this step. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group.February 2003 Steps 1. — OR — Reject the active group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. go to step 4.

It will only append systems to the element. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. page 226 . A fenced group will override the active temporary group. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. Select the Add Systems Group command. The system(s) is added. the system defined at placement. The Add Systems form displays. it will not be duplicated. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. 9. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. 2. For example. This command will not change the master system. Steps 1. Modify 245 . Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. 3. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. see Define Group.

If the Project Rule Set is not defined. that is. the subsystem are all unselected. While this button is depressed. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Project Rules cannot be assigned. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. When a new active system is selected. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For example. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. 246 . Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Systems — Displays all the available systems. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems.

The active group to be changed highlights. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. one-lines. Press <D> to accept the group. Steps 1._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. If an * displays in the List column. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. drop points. The active group is changed to the new system type. then the Project Rule can be assigned. A network may be thought of as all RCPs. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. Modify 2. select the *. 9. Select the Replace Systems by Group command. page 226 . select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. 247 . The Replace Systems form displays. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. 3. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. When defining the group for this command. see Define Group. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. To clear the Project Rule. When a row is selected.

route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. (See Propagation Setup. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. A fence group overrides the active group. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. using the Define Group command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 248 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. If automatic propagation is toggled on. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. reset a command action. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). accept input.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. see Define Group.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. page 226. You must define a temporary group of elements.

Repeat this step. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. Go to step 3. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. and the command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. go to step 4. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . 4. the command exits automatically. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Steps 1. 2. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. 9. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. the command exits automatically. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. go to step 2. The command exits automatically. if any remain. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Repeat this step. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. Modify 3. — If you have a fence in the design.

— OR — Reject the active group. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Accept the active group. The command exits automatically. The command exits automatically. 250 .

route one-lines. reject input. Go to step 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. using the Define Group command. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the message No active group defined displays. 251 . go to step 3. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. go to step 2. and the command exits automatically. see Define Group. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. Steps 1. A fence group overrides the active group. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file. and exit a command. 2. page 226. page 119. see Precision Input Form. You must define a temporary group of elements. For detailed information about precision input. If you have not defined a group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. the contents of the group are deleted. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. you can locate elements. reset a command action. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. go to step 4. 9. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

The system deletes all valid elements within the group. The command exits automatically. Repeat this step. 4. 3. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.February 2003 The command exits automatically. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. the command exits automatically. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. and prompts you to delete another group element. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. the command exits automatically. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system deletes the element. 252 . — OR — Reject the active group. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The command exits automatically.

and cross sections. review. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. and symbology settings for your design file. reviews. and engineering units. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. Setup 253 . reviews. Symbology Control — Defines. model annotation. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. 10. one-line types. systems. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines._ _______________ 10. Setup Commands In a new design file. Set Text Defaults — Defines. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. report IDs. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define. and modifies the default parameters for text. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. RCPs. and modify the default parameters. working view. text nodes. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. reviews.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 254 .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file.

see the appropriate command descriptions. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. 10. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control). Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Setup 255 . For individual command prerequisites. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands. Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time.

in sub-units. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems. and/or modify the values in these fields. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. represented by the matrix buttons. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. existing systems. To change a displayed value. see Define Duct Cross Section. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. define. including cross section parameters. reviews. select the field. select the field. define._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in a new value. between the routed cable/conduit. and modifies raceway defaults. see Define Duct Cross Section. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. define. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. 256 . You can review. You can review. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. To change a displayed value. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. and/or modify the settings. page 164 for more information. select the field. such as Color or Active Angle. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. and key in a new value. symbol defaults. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. page 164 for more information. Margin Width — Defines the distance. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. and key in a new value.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. You can review. To change a displayed value.

select the slide bar. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. select first the key field and then the Display button. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. You can review. Additionally. select the field. define. To change the current working view. 3. define. You can review. and/or modify the value in this field. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. and key in a new value. and drop point annotation. The scale includes views 1 through 8. and key in a new value. select the field. equipment pointer. equipment pointer. 10. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. Setup 257 . precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. 2. To change the displayed value._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. You can only view this data. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. and/or modify this key. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. To change a displayed value. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. or drop point). Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point).

The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. 258 . Steps 1. select the Select All button. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. so as to avoid duplication of elements. The System Definition form displays. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√).February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Define System command. select the Clear All button. If you need systems not available to you. 2. as well as those already selected for the current design file. In order to place one-lines.

Define System 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3. Setup 259 ._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file.

select the Clear All button. If you need one-line types not available to you. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. so as to avoid duplication of elements.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. Steps 1. 260 . as well as those already selected for the current design file. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Select the Define One-Line Type command. 2. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The One Line Type Definition form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. select the Select All button. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file. To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file.

Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. 10._ _______________ 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 261 .

page 260 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system. Therefore. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. For more information. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). page 258 and Define One-Line Type. all symbology is taken from the system defaults. Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. those oneline types will use a system default. 262 . to make any changes in symbology. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. page 264 . see Symbology Control. When you enter a new design file. see Define System. For more information.

select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. Setup 263 . 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 10. — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). Select the Set Symbology Control command. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems._ _______________ Steps 1. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. Using your cursor. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. select the No Overrides button. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). 3.

Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. reviews. 264 . or select the field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. or select the field. and key in the new value. and key in a system name. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. The display list contains a list of available systems. select another system from the list.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). page 262 for more information about this command). You can review and edit these settings. To change a value in the list. System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. and key in a new value. select another one-line type from the list. select the field. To change the displayed system.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Symbology Control 10._ _______________ Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Setup 265 . Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select the Symbology Control command. 2. 3. The Symbology Control form displays.

You will enter all values using the Text form. Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. or select a value from the list. You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. To change the current text node justification. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. 266 . reviews. text nodes. Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). To change the current text string justification. Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. and engineering units. or select a value from the list. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#).

Select the Set Text Defaults command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. You can only review the displayed settings. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. 10. Setup 267 . and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. 2. The Text form displays. Sub units. 3._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 268 .February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. Define which attributes to use. The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. Steps 1. 2. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form.

Create Cell Commands 10. If you want to modify the delivered library. and modify the copied version. Setup 269 . The cells you create using this command are stored. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. rway. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file.cel. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. in your cell library. copy it to a nonproduction directory. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. along with all existing cells. You must have write access to the library before modifying it. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file.February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. page 119 . To display a list of available cell libraries. For detailed information about precision input. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. see Precision Input Form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. 270 .

10. Include all the graphic elements of the component. 3. Go to step 2. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Create Model Cell This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Steps 1. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. 271 . To display a list of available cell libraries. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Include all the graphic elements of the component._ _______________ Create Model Cell Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. key in rc=. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. 2. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. 4. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Select the Model button from the form. Setup 5. The Select cell type form displays. Select the Create Cell command. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. go to step 7. page 178 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . go to step 10. select the Column value field. When complete. However. see Annotate Element. etc. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.February 2003 6. For detailed information about the annotation form. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. 7. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. Return to step 7. you are prompted to place any new values. To enter a value. 9. Data point <D> to place. 8. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. If you select Annotate. key in the value. select the field again and key in the new value. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. 272 . If you select Close. Placing sheet. To make a change or correction. When you accept the fence. The Annotate Element form displays. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. and press <Return>.

When complete. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. you are returned to step 7. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. key in the value. Create Model Cell 11. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. Return to step 11. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). To make a change or correction. the Close cell parameters form displays._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. To enter a value. The description is optional. and press <Return>. 12. When you select Close. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. Refer to Error Messages. You must enter a cell name. This step repeats for each enter data field. various error messages will display. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. select the input box again and key in the new value. When complete. 10. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. select the input box. 10. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. Setup 273 .

key in rc=. Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Steps 1. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. 2. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Go to step 2. 4. 3. 274 . Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Include all the graphic elements of the component. The Select cell type form displays. 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu.February 2003 Create Equipment Pointer Cell This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. To display a list of available cell libraries.

key in the value. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. and press <Return>. 9. page 178 . you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. go to step 11. select the Column value field. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Placing equipment tag. When complete. Create Equipment Pointer Cell If you select Annotate. 275 . Data point <D> to place. However. 7. To make a change or correction. 8. The Annotate Element form displays. etc. To enter a value. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. If you select Close. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. select the field again and key in the new value. go to step 7. For detailed information about the annotation form. Return to step 7._ _______________ 6. Setup For all new displayed text attributes. reset <R> to skip 10. see Annotate Element. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. When you accept the fence.

you are returned to step 7. When you select Close. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. To make a change or correction. various error messages will display. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. To enter a value. select the input box again and key in the new value. and press <Return>. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. select the input box. key in the value. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. This step repeats for each enter data field. Return to step 11. 11. 12. Refer to Error Messages. You must enter a cell name. 10. The description is optional.February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. When complete. 276 . If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. the Close cell parameters form displays. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. When complete. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active.

) Press <D> to accept the fence. key in rc=. Go to step 2. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Steps 1. 277 . Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Include all the graphic elements of the component. Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. To display a list of available cell libraries. Setup Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. 4. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. Enter second fence point 10._ _______________ Create Drop Point Cell Create Drop Point Cell This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 2. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. The Select cell type form displays. 3. place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu.

select the field again and key in the new value. etc. and press <Return>. they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>. save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). However. For detailed information about the annotation form. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. If you select Close. Placing drop point tag. When you accept the fence. see Annotate Element. Return to step 7. The Annotate Element form displays. If you select Annotate. 278 .February 2003 6. Data point <D> to place. allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell. When complete. 9. 8. a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate. key in the value. go to step 7. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. To make a change or correction. 7. you are prompted to place any new values. To enter a value. reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. go to step 11. select the Column value field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. page 178 .

select the input box again and key in the new value. When complete. You must enter a cell name. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. Return to step 11._ _______________ Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. When you select Close. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. key in the value. Create Drop Point Cell 11. select the input box. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. the Close cell parameters form displays. Refer to Error Messages. Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. page 377 for descriptions of these messages. 10. you are returned to step 7. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements. confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). This step repeats for each enter data field. To make a change or correction. various error messages will display. and press <Return>. Setup 279 . 10. To enter a value. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. When complete. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. 12. The description is optional.

or reviews the sheet name in a model. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file. Annotate Model — Adds._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file. 280 . and the defined one-line types. Commands Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters. Unlock Model — Unlocks the model. changes. the defined systems.

10. page 119 . However. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file._ _______________ Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Using the Model Commands Before Using These Commands You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. see Precision Input Form. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands. For detailed information about precision input. you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command. Group Workflow Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model. Setup 281 . because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session.

If the model was locked when you selected this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. the message Model is already locked displays. Therefore. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database. 282 . Select the Lock Model command. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types.February 2003 Lock Model This command locks the model. you should lock your model after setup. The model is locked. but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters.

— OR — Exit the command. see Precision Input Form. 10. Setup 283 . reset a command action. reject input. and exit a command. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode. accept input. route one-lines. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. 2. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. Steps 1. Select the Move Model Annotation command. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and place it. you can locate elements.

Steps 1. 2. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model. A warning form displays. 3.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 284 . you must first unlock the model using this command. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. Select the Unlock Model command.

Select the Annotate Model command. The Load Database process. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. Setup 285 ._ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. If you want to display the annotation in the model. 4. If you toggled Display to On. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. however. 3. will prevent such duplication. 2. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. 10. Steps 1. The Annotate Element form displays. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation.

February 2003 286 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

modify. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. Runtime Setup Commands 11. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters._ _______________ 11. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. based on the current active one-line type. 287 . and allows you to set new active parameters. Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type.

Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you can use these commands throughout the design session. See Setup Commands. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types. Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. 288 .

Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. the field remains null. and key in the new value. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. For example. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. You can only review the information in this field. If blanks exist for a field. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. You can review and modify the values in this field. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Once you have deleted the override. You can enter blank spaces into the design. page 294 )._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. which is based on the current active one-line type. select the column value field and delete the blank character. select this field. 289 . then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. To change the values associated with a one-line type. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form. Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes. Otherwise. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database.

If no key exists in the user element. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. Where the toggle is On. select the *. but cannot delete it. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. the field remains null. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. the key specified in the user element is used. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. To change the displayed value. The key field is updated. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. it becomes an override key to the reference database. and key in a new value. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. then it will display an R. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. You can only review the information in this column. 290 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can modify it. If an * displays in the List column. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. To display the codelist. select the field. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. If you delete the value in this field. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Otherwise. Once you place an override key on an element. the Access column displays a R/W. the value will display in the design where you place it. You can only review the information in this field. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If you can only view (read) the column value. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. the Default key is used.

If you select Cancel (X). which automatically activates it. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. and then select Confirm (√). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). select the row you want. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. If more than one row matches the criteria. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. 291 .

An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays. representing zero or more characters.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. 292 . This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. If you do not enter another operator. This operator is a wild card. This operator is a wild card._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. the system assumes =. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 3. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value.

displayed. these values are loaded into the project database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. optionally. Runtime 293 . When you load the project database._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and.

294 .February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. page 260 ). The one-line type you selected highlights. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. select the one-line type you want to make active. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. The Active One Line Type form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available. 3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. From the list. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. 2. Steps 1.

the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. Using the Set Active System form. page 258 ). Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. When a new active system is selected._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. the subsystems are all unselected. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. While this button is depressed. Project Rules cannot be assigned. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. whereas subsystems do not. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. 295 . Set Active System 11. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. you can select a new active system from the set of those available.

When a row is selected. The Active System form displays.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. To access the list of subsystems. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Steps 1. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. Select the Set Active System command. 2. select the *. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then a Project Rule can be assigned. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. press the Subsystem button. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. To clear the Project Rule. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. 296 . If an * displays. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3.

Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol.Propagates straight sections. Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it. Sketch .Sketches standard straights and fittings. radius. Eden . page 108 . Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition. Propagation Setup 11.Propagates straight sections and fittings. 297 ._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. Cutback . All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification.Propagates straight sections only. Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. Rough . and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. regardless of the settings on this form. see The Drawing Process. Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. For additional information about propagation. Smooth .Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides.

The Propagation Setup form displays. that affect the graphical display of the propagation. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Also. like editing the size.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. elements are automatically propagated when placed. Select the Propagation Setup command. 298 . Steps 1. part verification will be performed. 3. any changes you make to an element. If you set the toggle to On. regardless of the status of this toggle. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. automatic propagation is disabled. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. 2. When the toggle is set to Off.

Set Active Levels 11. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. or select the field. and key in a new value. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. Runtime View — Displays the active view. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. and the levels on which they display. 299 . 1 . but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). To turn on or off the display of a particular level. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. When a level has its display turned on. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. the button appears to be depressed. Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. select the appropriate level number. To change the active view._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. their corresponding one-line types. select a value from the list. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems.63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active.

300 . 2. The Levels form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1.February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. Select the Set Active Levels command.

Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. location and radius of each bend in the run. Return to step 2. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. Select the Display Element Information command. Steps 1. Return to step 2. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. 3. and coordinate location of ends and bends. or an RCP within a run is selected. This information includes: segment lengths. Display Element Information 11. 2. a straight section. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. then run information is displayed. 301 . If either a one-line._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. a fitting within a run. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID._ _______________ 12. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. In addition. Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element. 303 . You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. sector/word position) you provide. Utilities Commands 12. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file, or shows the coordinate system currently active.

304

_ _______________
Using the Utilities Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Using the Utilities Commands

Before Using These Commands
12. Utilities
You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
In general, you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID, for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID, for example).

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

305

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Toggle Construction Display On/Off
This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. Therefore, this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements.

Steps
1. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. 2. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. When construction display is On, the view number displays in a prompt. 3. Press <R> to exit the command. Once you have exited the command, select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle.

306

_ _______________
Highlight Element by Sector/Word
This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG, and both are relative to 1. If the position is valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Element by Sector/Word

Highlight Sector/Word With Filename
12. Utilities
You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. Press <Esc> to exit.

307

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 5. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value. After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

308

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID

Highlight Element by ASID ID

This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. If the ASID ID you specify is valid, the raceway element highlights, but is not added to the working set.

Highlight ASID ID With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. For example, to see where propagation errors exist in your design file, you can specify the file pro.err. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for a file, the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory.

12. Utilities

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. The Select hilite asid mode form displays.

2.

Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command.

309

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Go to step 6. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. Return to step 1. 4. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. 5. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Return to step 2. 6. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename, a file display form displays.

310

_ _______________
Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 7. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to step 2. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. Return to step 1.

Highlight Element by ASID ID

After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. Go to step 8.

12. Utilities

8.

Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted.

9.

Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to step 5. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Return to step 3.

311

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Element by Link
This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. If the entity and mslink are valid, the element highlights, but is not added to a working set. If the element is part of a complex element, the entire complex element highlights. The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell), 3 (line), 4 (line string), 6 (shape), 7 (text node), or 17 (text).

Highlight Link With Filename
You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. The file will display in a form on the screen, allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file. If you do not specify a pathname for the file, the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Go to Step 4. 3. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. 4. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. 5. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values.

312

_ _______________
After you select a line, select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. Go to Step 6. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. Return to Step 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Point to view for window

Highlight Element by Link

12. Utilities

Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1.

313

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Highlight Propagation Errors
This command highlights propagation errors in the design file.

Steps
1. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. The pro.err file displays.

2.

Review the errors listed on the form. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file, select the error(s) from the list, and select Confirm (√). The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file, and the pro.err form redisplays. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors.

3.

Continue highlighting propagation errors. Go to step 2. — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command.

314

_ _______________
Display Sector/Word Value
This command displays the sector and word position, in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Display Sector/Word Value

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Sector/Word command. Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for, and accept it with a <D>. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

12. Utilities

315

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Display Element Type and ASID ID
This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID), in the MicroStation command window, of an identified element.

Steps
1. 2. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command.

316

2. in the MicroStation command window. Display Link Steps 1. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. of an identified element. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. Utilities 317 . 12._ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. Select the Display Link command. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>.

accept input. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. At any point during this operating sequence. along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. Using the form. reset a command action. — OR — Exit the command. The identified element highlights. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. 2. The precision input form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. 318 . reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. system. Go to step 2._ _______________ 3. Go to step 2. The system prompts you to identify another element. Display System and One-Line Type 12. The system prompts you to identify another element. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. 319 . and subsystems (if applicable). 4. Continue identifying elements in the design file.

320 . you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS).February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. Instead. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model. Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. If you desire to change the coordinate system. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. Activate Plant Coordinate System. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model.

The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar._ _______________ 13. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. 13. 321 . Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database.

Operating Information Because the operating sequence. command key-ins. 322 . instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session. Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command. and screen prompts vary for each command. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. 13. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file._ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin.

324 . The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units.

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. The Load database screen displays. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. 325 . Accept will load database. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. where you may review the errors. The message file is created on every run of the process. the message above displays. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. When complete. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the message above displays. select Confirm (√)._ _______________ Steps 1. When you are finished completing the input information. Database 3. Steps 2. Enter error and output filenames. and the process begins. or accept the displayed defaults. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. 13. Select Load database command. and is displayed automatically to the screen. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

dat file (win32app\eerway\data). page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. To change the output filename. see Create Project for the directory structure.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. select the output file box and key in a new name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. You must load the project database before running any reports.) 326 . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. When you process a report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. See Reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. All reports are kept in the /reports directory. an input screen displays. You can change the name of the output file or error file. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report.

Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. Select the Report command. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 . Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Select the report you want to run from the list. 2. the new file will overwrite that file. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. 13. 4. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. Report Steps 1. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. 3._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. For instance. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. you should name the output files yourself. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. You should give each report you want to save a unique name.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. 328 .February 2003 direction.

dat file in win32app\eerway\data. or change that information according to your specifications. an input screen displays. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. page 545 . 329 . These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Database This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. see Reports. For more detailed information about each rule check. Overview 13. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. When you process a rule check.

Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. you should name the output files yourself. the new file will destroy the previously created file. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Steps 1. 2. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. 4.February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project. 330 . 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select the Rule command. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process.

Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database. based on the design filename you specify. that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections: Raceway Processes Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file. with the name you specify. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu._ _______________ 14. based on the internal sheet name you specify.. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s . Raceway Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks./rway/dgn directory. 14. EERWAY Processes 331 .

The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.February 2003 Load Database This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively. one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* 332 . The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. Thus. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. 1.

and select Confirm (√). EERWAY Processes 2. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The Load database screen displays. Steps 1. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system._ _______________ str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** Load Database Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. Select Load database from the Process menu. Enter drawing name. 333 . *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. The columns are optional for Load Database. 14.

Enter error and output filenames. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Select the desired operating mode. select Confirm (√). or accept the displayed defaults. 4. and the process begins. When you are finished completing the input information. Confirm your selections. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. where you may review the errors. Background. 334 . page 64 ). This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. When complete. and is displayed automatically to the screen. the message above displays. the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. 5. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.February 2003 3.

Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process.bat: Batch File Option SET SET SET SET SET SET MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ 14. Setup an rway. EERWAY Processes 335 ._ _______________ Batch File Option The load database process can be executed from a batch file.

based on the design filename you specify. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run. nor will it delete information from user-defined tables. unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. The Unload Design database screen displays. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files). You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. Steps 1. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP).February 2003 Unload Design This process unloads a design from a relational database. and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. 336 . one-lines. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. Select Unload from the Process menu. 3. and select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 2. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). Enter design name.

The . page 64 ). You may choose between foreground. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. select Confirm (√).err file. the message above displays. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. Unload Design When you are finished completing the input information._ _______________ 4. Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections. the message above displays. is created on every run of the process. When complete. 5. and the process begins. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.msg file. The . and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. background. 14. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. EERWAY Processes 337 .

Key in a sheet name. The Unload Sheet database screen displays. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). If the sheet name contains blanks. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . based on the internal sheet name you specify.February 2003 Unload Sheet This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database. 3. and select Confirm (√). Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu. and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing. it must be specified in single quotes. and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block. 2. one-lines. 338 . Steps 1. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading.

the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 5. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Select the desired operating mode. The . Unload Sheet When you are finished completing the input information. The . page 64 ).msg file. Confirm your selections. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. When complete. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. You may choose between foreground. the message above displays. and the process begins. and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. background. EERWAY Processes You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page. 4. 339 . 14. is created on every run of the process. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.err file. select Confirm (√). the message above displays._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run.

This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. and select Confirm (√). and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. but for some reason was not removed from the database. This process will not delete drawings. 2.February 2003 Cleanup Database This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. Enter error and output filenames. The Cleanup Database screen displays. It then makes a list of all valid drawings. and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. For example. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. onelines. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP). 340 . Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu. Steps 1. or accept the displayed defaults. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information. When complete. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen.err file. Confirm your selections. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. select Confirm (√). Background. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You may choose between Foreground. the message above displays. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. 4. 341 . Select the desired operating mode. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing. the message above displays. The . is created. The process begins.msg file. page 64 ). EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 14. 3. It will display mostly zeroes.

The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays.env>.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Steps 1. the process writes the file to <current_project>. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. 342 . you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). 3. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Upon completion. Enter design name. 2. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename.

and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The process begins. The . This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Otherwise._ _______________ 4. lists all errors that occurred during the process. Otherwise. The .prj/rway/tmp directory. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen.msg file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.prj/rway/tmp directory. 14. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. background. 5. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. displays all processing information. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. Select the desired operating mode. EERWAY Processes 343 . the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. When complete.err file. select the Confirm button (√). Confirm your selections. the above message displays. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. You may choose between foreground.

— OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2. Steps 1. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. 3. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. the process writes the file to <current_project>. Key in a name for the envelope file. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√).February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 344 . Upon completion. 4.env>. Enter design name. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. Otherwise. select the Confirm button (√). The . the above message displays. lists all errors that occurred during the process. The process begins. 6. Otherwise. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. the above message displays. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. 14. When complete. Select the desired operating mode. You may choose between foreground. EERWAY Processes 345 .err file. Confirm your selections. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen._ _______________ 5. background.prj/rway/tmp directory. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes).prj/rway/tmp directory. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. displays all processing information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. The .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 346 .

then edit the . Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. For information about accessing the processes.EErc file in your home directory. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. Eden Processes 347 . Each Eden process is described in a separate section. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. manipulate the Eden symbol library. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. 15. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation . List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols._ _______________ 15. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. page 59 . then edit the to specify the appropriate directory. see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. and edit the Eden symbol file. If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory.

February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 348 .

_ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. and key in a new filename. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). 15. To change the displayed default library name. and key in a new option. To change the displayed option. select the field. select the field. See Eden Symbol Generation. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. To change the displayed output filename. 349 . see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. To change the displayed error filename. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. select the field. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. For information about the path to the symbol source file. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a filename. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. For information about the path to the symbol library. To enter the symbol source file.

the above message displays. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. page 89. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and batch operating modes. When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. You can choose between foreground. The . 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The . The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. page 67 . and select Confirm (√). see Output. see EDEN.February 2003 Steps 1. background.msg file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 350 . Select the desired operating mode. select Confirm (√).err file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the message above displays. contains any output from the process. Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. 4.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. For information about operating modes. and the Eden process begins. 2. Confirm your selections.

Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed library name. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. and key in the name._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. 15. Eden Processes 351 . see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To enter the symbol name. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library.

the above message displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 3. and select Confirm (√). You can choose between foreground._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select Confirm (√). contains any output from the process. see EDEN. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Confirm your selections. 352 . page 89. When you have completed the input information. the message above displays. and the Eden process begins.msg file. The .err file. Select the desired operating mode. see Output. For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. 2. The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. page 67 . You can view either file on the screen. and batch operating modes.February 2003 Steps 1. 4. The . background.

To change the displayed library name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a new library name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed error filename._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. 15. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. Eden Processes 353 . select the field.

When you have completed the input information. The . page 67 . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.msg file. Select the desired operating mode. select Confirm (√). see Output. and the Eden process begins. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. The . The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 3.err file. contains any output from the process. For information about operating modes. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. and batch operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 2. You can view either file on the screen.February 2003 Steps 1. the message above displays. 4. 354 . the above message displays. The . You can choose between foreground. an ASCII file located in the current working directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. and select Confirm (√). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. page 89. background. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. see EDEN. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.

To change the displayed library name. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. see EDEN. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. 2. You can choose between foreground. select the field._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. select the field. Steps 1. 3. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. 355 . 15. and key in a new filename. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. and key in a new filename. page 67 . For information about the path to the symbol library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and key in a new library name. background. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. For information about operating modes. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and batch operating modes. To change the displayed output filename. and select Confirm (√).

You can view either file on the screen. contains any output from the process.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The .msg file. 356 . Confirm your selections. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. the above message displays. page 89. the message above displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When you have completed the input information. and the list will display. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.February 2003 4. The . The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output.

357 . and key in a new filename. and select Confirm (√). The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. and key in a new filename. and key in a name. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. To enter a library name. To change the displayed output filename. 15. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. Eden Processes Steps 1. To enter a library name. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. select the field. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. 2. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. For information about the path to the symbol library. For information about the path to the symbol library. and key in a name. select the field.

You can choose between foreground. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When you have completed the input information. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and the Eden process begins. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Confirm your selections. the above message displays. For information about operating modes. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. the message above displays. background. Select the desired operating mode. see EDEN. 358 .msg file. see Output.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 4. select Confirm (√).February 2003 3. You can view either file on the screen. and batch operating modes. The . page 89. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. contains any output from the process.err file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. page 67 .

Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and batch operating modes. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. page 67 . and key in a new filename. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. For information about operating modes. select the field. Steps 1. Select the desired operating mode. To change the displayed library name. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 359 . see EDEN. Eden Processes 2. and key in a new filename. background. and select Confirm (√). Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. To change the displayed error filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. 3. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. You can choose between foreground._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. 15. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols.

an ASCII file located in the current working directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review.msg file. You can view either file on the screen.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . the message above displays. The . When you have completed the input information.February 2003 4. Confirm your selections. page 89. see Output. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. contains any output from the process. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 360 . the above message displays. and the Eden process begins. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The .err file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. select Confirm (√).

Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Eden Processes 361 . Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. and key in the name. select the field. 15._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed library name. select the field. and key in a new filename. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To enter the symbol name. and key in a new library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. To change the displayed output filename. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. select the field. for example). exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. then edit the . The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC.

The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground. 2. 4. The . and batch operating modes. page 67 . page 89. Confirm your selections. The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. For information about operating modes. the above message displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. contains any output from the process. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.February 2003 Steps 1. 362 . Select the desired operating mode. see EDEN.msg file.err file. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and the Eden process begins. The . 3. and select Confirm (√). background._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When you have completed the input information. see Output. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. The . You can view either file on the screen. select Confirm (√). the message above displays.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.

The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. 15.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. and key in the name. To change the displayed error filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. select the field. select the field. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory. then edit the . To enter the user function name. Eden Processes 363 . and key in a new library name. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed library name. for example). see the description at the beginning of this chapter._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. and key in a new filename.

and select Confirm (√). an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 2. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.err file. background. 4. and batch operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. and the Eden process begins. 364 . the message above displays. 3. You can choose between foreground. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The .February 2003 Steps 1. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. page 67 . Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. see EDEN. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. The . Confirm your selections. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. When you have completed the input information. select Confirm (√). For information about operating modes.

The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays. page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output. contains any output from the process. Extract EDEN User Function From Library 15. Eden Processes 365 .msg file. You can view either file on the screen. The ._ _______________ Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To enter a symbol filename. For information about the path to the symbol source file. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. and key in a symbol file name. To change the displayed output filename. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new standard ASCII editor name.February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. select the field. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. select the field. select the field. To change the displayed editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. 366 .

an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. page 89. When you have completed the input information. The . The . 15. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list. see EDEN._ _______________ Steps 1. see Output. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the Eden process begins. the above message displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 3. The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . and batch operating modes. Eden Processes 367 . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. contains any output from the process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. You can view either file on the screen. You can choose between foreground. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. For information about operating modes. page 67 . 4.msg file. the message above displays. Steps Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. and select Confirm (√).err file. select Confirm (√). background. Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 368 .

providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. review the PDS clashes in a model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. Integrated Commands 369 . 16. not when running standalone EE Raceway. create a window containing a specific element._ _______________ 16. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. Integrated Commands The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. and display information about the reference models attached to the current model.

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. and must have an existing clash in the design area. 370 . you can use these commands throughout the design session. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command.February 2003 Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file.

1 Review PDS Attributes The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments). Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command. 16. Integrated Commands 371 . you need to display construction type elements. Review PDS Attributes Parameters Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box._ _______________ 16. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file.

2 Reference PDS Model The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. click Attach. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. then. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. 372 . You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. click Attach. then. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model.February 2003 16._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model.

Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. Integrated Commands 373 ._ _______________ Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Reference PDS Model 16.

Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting. Line ID. Drop Point Tag. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label.3 Window to Named PDS Item The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. PE HVAC. Depending on which discipline you select. Options Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag.February 2003 16. or Raceway. Pipe Tag. the item attributes you can search for changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can select: Piping. Equipment. Piping Component Number. Inspection Iso ID. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files. 374 . One Line Tag. or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Instrument Component Number.

select the field and key in a marker number. Integrated Commands 375 . Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. or.4 Review PDS Clash The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes. Review PDS Clash Parameters Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. 16. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved._ _______________ 16. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows.

Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area.February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Click Select View then select the view you want to update. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. 376 .

Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. 377 . Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible.

Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. 378 . Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation.

Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. 379 . Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: None. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege.

Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. and replace the one-line.". or ". If the problem persists. If the problem persists. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. "$". Recovery: The program will restore the original text. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. and replace the one-line. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: Key in another cell name. digits. 380 . the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Cannot Place Cross Section. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. call Intergraph support. Cannot Place Cross Section. call Intergraph support. Invalid sys on oneline. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Recovery: Key-in in only characters._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table.ins is not in the proper location. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: None. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. 381 . Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support.

Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Please export this variable. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Could not get one line type from user data. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. 382 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database.

A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: There are various recoveries. 383 . Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: None._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. based on cause of error. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: None. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file.

Could not write to TCB. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Make sure the key is correct.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. The database is case-dependent. If the key does not exist. 384 . insert it into the reference database.

Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters. Recovery: Enter design filename. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. Recovery: None. change the spec. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. 385 .

Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. 386 . Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal.

Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file.err did not close properly._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. 387 . Recovery: Make sure the pro. Reason: File pro.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Enter a new value. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Recovery: Change access to design file. Propagation status may not be recorded. Error closing propagation log file.

Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. 388 . Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add entries to reference database.

Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . 389 . A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Correct entry.EErc file. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table.

Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. 390 .

ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error opening design file <string>. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. 391 . Recovery: Change annotation of element. one datum point. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. and one element. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol.

sql file.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. 392 . Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Add privileges to database.sql file. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. 393 . A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid.

Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Add privilege. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. 394 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.February 2003 Error saving symbology .

Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Recovery: Add privilege to database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. 395 . Recovery: None. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Fix other errors. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Recovery: Key in a value. Reason: Internal error. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Fatal error! Vector length was negative.

Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting.February 2003 File <string> exists. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. For example. at a cross. 396 . Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. extension or transition of the fitting. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. change the spec. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case.

Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Fatal error. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. 397 . A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Try to exit and re-enter the software. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Possible memory allocation problem. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. a form could not be displayed by the software. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255.

Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file./config/assign file. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the .February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. 398 .

Reason: The symbolname is blank. <numeric value>. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. Invalid Eden Processor Input. 399 . Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. For example. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line.

Recovery: Enter an integer value.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Key in another value. Invalid key in ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 400 . For example. Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0.February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. If it is a cable entry. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. click on the REMOVE button to delete. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. Recovery: Select another graphic group number.

Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. 401 . Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Enter a valid response. vertex <numeric value>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Invalid RCP . Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt.

Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. 402 . Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Enter another sector/word value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: Enter LT. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. CT. Recovery: Fix other problems. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type.or RB in the justification field. or RB. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. RC. LC. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. LC. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. and place the element or RCP. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. Must be LT. LB. 403 .. CC. RT.. CB. ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Delete all but one title block.

No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group.cel)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 404 . No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command.

Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. B. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. B. 405 . Recovery: Key in another name. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. or C in the active specification. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. C for the cross section type. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element.

February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. 406 . Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database with parts.

Recovery: Populate the database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. 407 . Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line.

Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. 408 .February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: None._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Recovery: Select another option.

Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. title block. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. three-line. Select failed. Recovery: Specify new find criteria._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. 409 . Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. RCP). Recovery: Enter schema name. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file.

unl file or inserting a row through SQL. 410 . Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Enter sheet name. Recovery: Identify a valid text element.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory.

Recovery: None. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. snap to the angle. therefore.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. cannot be edited. A: Error Messages Title block placed . Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. 411 . To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero.

Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found./config/assign file and that its value is a full path.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Recovery: If necessary. Recovery: Change the title block annotation./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. 412 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table.

Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form. you must key in a group name. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. 413 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 414 .

Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file.cmd file as it is delivered.cmd file and customizing menus. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. Appendix I: rway. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files.cmds contains the rway.cmd file contains the alias. rule checks. reports.cmds file. Appendix H: alias. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section. 415 . Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases. It attaches the panel menu. B: System/App Mgmt. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. You can modify or disable this function through the file.

February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process. Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 416 .

as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. ee_out_width real. Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software.EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor). To change the form design. 1. and rway. ee_dimension_1 real. ee_out_ht_diam real not null. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. For detailed information about editing your . alias. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform). ee_dimension_2 real. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. ee_units integer not null. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. 417 . ee_extension real.cmd.unl files and database tables. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the .

create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). char(20).unl file. create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). For sample files. ee_tl_subtype integer. ee_spec_key char(28). 418 .unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. ee_part char(20). create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . real. grant all on trench_spec to public. ee_part_key char(28) not null. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. ee_symbol char(6). or you can add the data to your vendor. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). Create a <one-line_type>_spec. create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). ee_angle real. ee_weight real.unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db. 3. ee_spec2_key char(28).unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type.February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. char(28) not null. real. ee_tl_qual integer. 2. ee_description char(40) ). create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). All delivered . grant all on trench_part to public. char(40) ). char(6).unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. refer to the tray_spec and tray_part .

Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. 1. 9. For information about codelists. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part.unl files to the rwayref.unl files and database tables. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. 8. Customizing 5. 6. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. INSERT INTO tray_part. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. 7. Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. 419 . Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. For detailed information about editing your . B: System/App Mgmt.unl file.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.unl" DELIMITER "|". You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref.cmd file. see the appendix entitled EE Databases.unl file. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type._ _______________ Appendix B: 4.unl file.

real._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database. INSERT INTO pullbox. 6. refer to the pullbox. or you add the data to your tlt. For a sample special fitting .unl file. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1). Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. 3. real. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. or you can insert records in the vendor. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. real. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. char(40) ). You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database.cmd file. 7. char(6).unl" DELIMITER "|".unl file to the rwayref. real not null. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). char(20). 420 . 5. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. grant all on transit to public. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor).February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. char(28) not null. 4. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key).unl file. Add the newly-created <special fitting>. Create a <special fitting>. For basic information about creating Eden symbols. 2.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway.unl file. char(20).

_ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. In these files.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. 8.msg files. Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting. Use a standard text editor to modify the error. which you can modify. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. You cannot change this name. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. For information about codelists. or by inserting a record in the manprt. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). To the right of each = is the message itself.unl file. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. 10. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports.unl file. B: System/App Mgmt.unl file. 9.unl file. 421 . or by inserting a record in the mscatref. 11.

cs". EE Nucleus. File containing EE Raceway symbols. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. "am=ustn. These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. They include Microstation. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. Defines the path to the on-line Help files. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols. the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu.sb1"). and EE Raceway-specific variables.ndx) files. Used as a pointer to application programs.h1". Sets the directory for temporary files. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. "am=n. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee.sb" (i.men. or "am=n. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms.cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. 422 . Directory for the message files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This directory is also the location of user command index (. This variable will override the user preferences setting. Sets the directory for the on-line Help files. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n.e.

User-defined reference database sql file. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. Directory path for message files. Reference Database cmd file. delivered with the EE Nucleus product. A variable used for ORACLE databases. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. Directory path for EE Nucleus product. Reference Database sql file. Directory path for data files. Default username for archive/restore. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. User-defined reference database cmd file. it must be set to "A". Default nodename for archive/restore. Directory path and project database name. User-defined project database sql file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. Filename for the Eden symbol library._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. Project Database sql file. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Schema name for project database. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Project Database cmd file. 423 . Directory path for data files.EErc file. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. B: System/App Mgmt. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. Default remote path for archive/restore. Directory path for seed files. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. User-defined project database cmd file. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Directory path for the RIS product.

February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for EE forms. Schema name for reference database. Data files for DB Access Support. Directory path for INGRES executables. Directory path for EE symbol file. Filename of EE symbol file. 424 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Directory path for ORACLE executables. EE reference database server process.

The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. that supports it._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. RIS. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). The reference database is identified when you enter a project. they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. C: EE Databases 425 . Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. Thus. Processes needed in the procedures above. such as symbol and part information. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). (For those familiar with EDES. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. On-line Informix. and Ingres. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. that is. allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. Oracle.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. a generic relational database interface.

Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another. which you define. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system. in fact. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product.) 426 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . to attach to an SQL-type database.

The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. To do so. For more information about the risschema file. local or remote. After you have created an empty database._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information.) This process will create the risschema definition file. C: EE Databases 427 . using the risschema_mgr process. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. ownerships. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. page 50). — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities.

sql file that has a different structure than the original .cmd files.unl files to load into which tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match. Where a table lacks a unique index. To run it outside of the EE Environment. If you want to load a schema with default information. the process will: — add new tables listed in the .sql) file which contains the table and column structure.cmd file] schema name -v -q . This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q . — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .sql file] [-c .unl files that are listed in the . 428 . — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given .sql file.sql file. — AND — — the corresponding . If Update schema is used with a .cmd) file that defines which . the process loads it only if the table is empty.sql file.sql file -c . you can also include: — a command (. you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg. you must have at least: — an SQL (.February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information. and then key in the command line syntax for the process.unl file(s) which contain default information.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema.sql file. — load those tables having a unique index with data from the .

with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. C: EE Databases 429 . created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema._ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.

But if the project schema is custom-built. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. You can establish default attributes for drawings. 3. straights. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. fittings. All specification information is carried in the reference database. drop points. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. tray_spec. one-lines. Reporting. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. and so forth) during a design session. raceway connect points (RCPs). Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. for example. For example. one-lines. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. 2. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema. the drawing. including. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . RCP. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. one-line. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. if the reference schema is custom-built. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form.February 2003 Reference Schema . the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. and tray_part tables. 430 . RCPs. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. and equipment pointers. Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT.

Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema .General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer. Text annotation overrides any default values. C: EE Databases 431 . The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values.

approved 4 .approved 9 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows.approved 10 . You can add new approval status rows to this table.approved 6 .approved 5 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 . Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values.not approved 432 .approved 11 . and one_line tables in the project database. You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database. During loads of the project database.approved 7 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .blank 2 . For example.approved 8 .approved 3 . Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database. the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight. fitting. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values. The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.

The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove to this table. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information. but you must not remove the existing row. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. You can add new drawing types to this table. 433 .

The table also contains the ee_spec. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 . and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. ee_ol. The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. ee_part. The table contains the index_column column.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). You must not add or remove rows from this table. You can modify the index_value values. You can add. nor should you modify the index_column values. remove. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. The system table contains the system_num column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. nor should you modify the index_column values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product.

nor should you modify the index_column values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. You must not add or remove rows from the table. The table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can modify the index_value values. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. nor should you modify the index_column values.

The unit table contains the index_column column. You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database. but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . You must not add or remove rows from this table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. nor should you modify the index_column values.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can add vendors as necessary to this table. The vendor table contains the index_column column.

The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 . which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 . The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry.February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. You may add or remove rows from this table. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 441 . The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 .

3 wire system) Medium (Three phase._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) 443 . The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase.

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase, 3 wire system)

Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table
This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column, which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table, the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description

The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant, cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-, Moisture-, Heat- and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame- non-metallic covering) Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant, flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos, glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant, non-metallic covering)

444

_ _______________
Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-, Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-, Moisture- & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant, Moisture- and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat- and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene

Codelists

Yes-No Codelist Table
The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. You must not add or remove rows from this table. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description

C: EE Databases

The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes

445

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Fitting Environment Rules
The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. You can add, remove, or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software, at least, compares the number of intersection one-lines, the one-line type, and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. If found, the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number, zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number, zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name

The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90,180 90 90,180,270 90,180 90,180,270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY

446

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Fitting Environment Rules

Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90, 180, 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90

C: EE Databases

447

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Project Schema - General Description
The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project. The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing; its one-lines, RCPs, and three-lines. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database.

448

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Updating Schemas

Updating Schemas
Before you can update (that is, load with EE tables and default data) a schema, you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX, ORACLE, INGRES). Additionally, you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database.

Updating a Project Schema
Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update project schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists.

C: EE Databases

Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Updating Reference Schemas
Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment, using the Update reference schema option. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. No paths are required, since this is a schema name, not a database name. Given the schema name, RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema, if one exists. Sql and Cmd Files

449

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables, views, and to grant permissions within the schema, while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. If you select multiple applications, then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database.

Schema Names
When creating your RIS schemas, you should use the same name as your project, since this will be the default name when you enter the project. However, you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/.EErc file to be your project schema name.

450

_ _______________
Appendix C:

Modifying the Reference Schema

Modifying the Reference Schema
You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. To modify the database schema before schema creation, simply include the necessary changes in the .sql file before Update schema is executed. The .sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. The SQL statements in the .sql file are the input to the Update schema process. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. Therefore, columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the .sql file. For example, columns are added into the .sql file for the one_line table, these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema, the following actions take place: 1. 2. 3. 4. Saves rows from existing table. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). Creates new table according to "create table" statement. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition.

C: EE Databases

If rows exist in the updated table, any new columns that are added will be blank in each row. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Therefore, you need only to modify the ".sql" file in order to modify a schema. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. 1. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ".sql" file, you would lose any data that may have been on that column. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. You can modify the size of a column, for example, from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer", but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur. If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10), for example), then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The .unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored; the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. If a table does not have a unique index, then the .unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema.

451

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *.unl files as defined in the command file. The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the .unl files into the database. These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults, part data, and codelist values. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. Certain columns are defined in the .sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the .unl file must not be null for that column. There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. The .unl files can be modified before the schema is updated. — OR —

You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. the RDBMS’s interactive query product, such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS, or ORACLE’s sqlplus, or INGRES’s SQL. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.exe). DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr.exe)

2. 3.

4.

The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1. To see which .unl files are being loaded into the reference database, look at the command (.cmd) file you will be using. The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file:

FILE "olt.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO ol_type;

These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. In this case the "olt.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.g. FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.unl). The delimiter is one character long. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl file. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files from being loaded. All existing .unl files must be loaded for proper product execution. 2. Edit the desired .unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1|

452

_ _______________
Appendix C: In this example, "1" is the index_column value, "TRAY" is the index_value column value, "240" is the ee_spec_table column, etc. If in the "olt.unl" file you would like to add additional entries, you can edit this file. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. The following example demonstrates how to load a new .unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. 1. 2. cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref.cmd. Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog.unl" DELIMITER "|"; INSERT INTO tray_spec; 3. Create a new file in the current directory, naming it catalog.unl. Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database, separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). For example:

Modifying the Reference Schema

1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV|

C: EE Databases

4.

When you have finished editing the .unl file, run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table.

453

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

approv_status
This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank, approved, not approved, and so forth. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes

index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status.

away_part
This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes

ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type.

454

Appendix C:

_ _______________

EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description

ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer, this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

away_spec
This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material, and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes

C: EE Databases

ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

455

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. The only valid entries are: A, B, or C. The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

cardinal
This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left, center left, bottom left, and so forth). Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point.

456

ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. 457 . Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.

ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 458 . ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. for example NEC 1990. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations.

ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. C: EE Databases 459 . ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT.

ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. material: the column used to define the conduit material. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. 460 . weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT.

ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 461 . or C. The associated shapes are shown below. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type. B. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. The only valid entries are: A. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.

Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. 462 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software.

Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. The only valid entries are: A. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. or C. The associated shapes are shown below. column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. B. 463 . ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. 464 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color. ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.

ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. 465 .Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description.

466 . ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable.

where the information crosses products. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. In some entries. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. 467 . If not. a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag. 468 . Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values.February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value.

469 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values. voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage.

text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. 470 . ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. In general. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. 471 . pullbox).

fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. MicroStation 32. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. 472 . It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. and DBAccess all support this table. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. RISRPT.

473 . the work_mode value is set to zero. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. In general. text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. It must exactly match the column name in the database. index_column: a column name that. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. if not NULL. column_name: the name of a column in the database.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table.

ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. and so forth). wireway. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. conduit. A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. 474 . ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information. ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information.

475 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name.

ee_description:this column contains the key description. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. 476 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. prj_name: this column contains the project name. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. location: this column contains the location. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set.

ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.

ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. 478 . rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length.

ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Zero if no check is to be performed. 479 . ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line.

elbow. bendable. horizontal. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. 480 . index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. flexible._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and so forth). and so forth).February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. and so forth). Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description. cross. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. wye. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. reducer.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. 481 . ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment.

ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. 482 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. C: EE Databases 483 . material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.

The associated shapes are shown below. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. The only valid entries are: A. catalog: the column that contains catalog information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 484 . B. or C. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type.

ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. 485 .Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number.

ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. The only valid entries are: A. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. or C. B. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. 486 . weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key.

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description
This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema, and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".

cabsch_spec
This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the revision number. cable_numb: the column containing the area number, cable number, and cable number ID. numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors.

487

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. not_used: this column is reserved for later use. plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique.

488

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

cndsch_spec
This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

C: EE Databases

revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number, conduit number, and conduit number ID. drawing_numb can have duplicate values, but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit, for example power, control, and so forth. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to.

489

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size. abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number.

490

_ _______________
Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

drawing
This table, used by all EE products, contains general information about each EE design file. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path.

C: EE Databases

sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database.

drop_point
This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table.

491

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point.

duct_fill
This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number, cable number, and cable number number ID. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule.

ee_pseudo_cable
This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table.

492

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_system
This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems.

envelope
This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes

C: EE Databases

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing.

493

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

fitting
This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length.

494

_ _______________
Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database).

C: EE Databases

fit_to_sys
This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes

ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

495

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

mscatalog
This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

tablename: the name of the table in the database. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.

496

_ _______________
Appendix C:

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

mscolumns
This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. Currently, there are no EE processors using this table. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no

entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. column_name: the name of a column in the database. It must exactly match the column name in the database. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only, while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form, the work_mode value is set to zero. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form.

C: EE Databases

497

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

ol_to_sys
This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes

ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.

one_line
This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table.

498

_ _______________
Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description

ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file.

C: EE Databases

499

Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. project This table contains specification information for the project. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing.

Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). location: the column containing location. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 501 ._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw.

Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. 502 . rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp.

EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section. 503 . ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. material: the column containing the straight section material. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. 504 . pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database).

ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. 505 . to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

D: Specs 507 .unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. key in SPEC at the command prompt. the reference database contains one table for each fitting type. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes. The system will attach a ._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. If you intend to add records to an existing . Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n). while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification.unl file or to create a new . the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified .unl and <one-line type>_spec.sav file. and conduit. This process allows you to add records to an existing .unl file easily and efficiently. These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. and will then write all records to that file. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray. To initiate the process. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. If you answer n to the prompt.unl file. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements.sav before running the process. The process will then write all records to this .sav extension to the specified table name. airway. Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product. wireway.sav file. copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications.unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs.

You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C.sav file and redisplays the column names. and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >. 508 . Copy the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. the system writes the information to the . Once you enter the final value for the displayed table. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your . press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.sav file back to the corresponding .February 2003 The system processes the information. For subsequent records.unl file to keep the records you have added. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record.sav file.

unl Files Sample .unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 .unl Files The following are examples of . tray_spec._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values.

the spec table contains all specifications. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. the outside height dimension in sub-units. 510 .February 2003 tray_part.unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. a dimension variable used by Eden. tray_spec and tray_part. As described previously. a dimension variable used by Eden. For information about running Update Reference Schema. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. the outside width dimension in sub-units. the .unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created. the fitting extension.

the unique tray specification key. the tray material. the fitting turn angle. the tray part catalog number. the Eden symbol.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the index_column value from the tl_qual table. the tray part description. see the appendix entitled EE Databases ._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. D: Specs 511 . the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the fitting bend radius. Sample . the secondary tray specification key for reducers. the tray specification description. the tray specification key. the tray part weight. the construction type. the weight per unit length of the run. the unique tray part key. the cross section symbol. * For information about the codelist values.

60.60.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.45.90.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .45. and Adjustable 90. and Adjustable 30.45.90. and Adjustable 30.90.60.

) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . For additional information about the Eden symbol language. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. fittings. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line. fittings. To review or modify the symbols in this library. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide.). and special parts (conduit bodies. pullboxes. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. etc. draw_arc. However. and special parts. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. etc.). You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read. The delivered symbol library is called eden. use the delivered Eden processes._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections.

eq.eq. val4. val1.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file.eq. height. 0. angle . ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. radius. extension.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .or. with or without extensions. height . angle._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .0 . val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow.or.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 .0 . val3. val5. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation. 0. 0. val2. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid.

0. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. 0. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. Point[0]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2].0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1]. Point[0] ) Point[0]. 0 ) Do i = 1. Point[0]. Point[0]. Point[i]. 0. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. 0 ) Endif 515 . 0. (Point[2]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0. Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 ) then Do i = 1. Point[ORG]. val6. -halfwid. Point[0]. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. NUMPTS. (Point[3]. (Point[4]. Point[BND2]. 0. val3. 0. -val1. 0 ) 0. radius. Point[0]. Point[0]. halfwid. NUMPTS. 0. 0. Point[0]. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension . Point[0]. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. 0. halfwid. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. val5. -val4.-extension. height. 0.0. 0. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0 ) 0. Point[0].ne. 0. val2. 0 ) 0. height._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. 0. -halfwid. -val1. 0.

-angle.Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. Point[0]. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . 0. 0. 0. height. 1.Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. 0 ) 0. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. Point[0]. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. -halfwid. 0 ) Do i = 1. NUMPTS. 0 ) Do i = 1. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. extension. NUMPTS.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. 0. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. 0. NUMPTS. Point[0]. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. halfwid. 516 . 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. 0 ) 0. Point[1]. (Point[4]. halfwid. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. 0 ) 0. When defining parts in the reference database. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. (Point[2]. -halfwid.ne. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. height. Point[i]. Point[0].Point[2].Point[BND2]. (Point[3]._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.....ee_out_wid Spec Table .ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table ... The symbol derives the values for angle.. .. they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.. For specification-driven parts... The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation.. EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database. Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden. see the table immediately following this description.. . 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .... It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions..ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table ... If the fitting has extensions.. while other critical points are defined relative to the origin. Spec Table ....ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table .ee_extension 517 ....ee_extension Spec Table . and radius from the global array DIMENSION..ee_out_wid Spec Table . Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow.ee_transition Spec Table .. the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution....ee_radius Spec Table .......... .... height... extension.. EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol... width..ee_dimension_1 Spec Table .. . Dimension 25 Spec Table .......ee_dimension_2 .. .._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow. In general. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .. ..

.. ............. .. Part Table . Dimension 25 Spec Table ..ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 ............... Spec Table .... .......... .................. Dimension 60 From Part Table .......ee_transition Spec Table ... 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 ... ...ee_dimension_60 518 .ee_dimension_1 Part Table ..February 2003 54 55 56 57 .ee_dimension_2 .. ..... .ee_dimension_1 Spec Table .ee_dimension_2 ....................... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .ee_radius Spec Table .. ......._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. .... .... .. .......

The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. By default. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. 519 . It identifies those files you can modify.

The following files exist under the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The product may reside on any file system. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation..February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable. /usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 ./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory. EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory.

C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. 521 .sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. — EEnotice. comments. eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes. — product.def – product definition file. and then invokes the EE environment. INFORMIX. etc. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. — legend – copyright notice file. EE Nucleus.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. The files are grouped by directory.txt – File containing release notices. problems. and EE WPD. — remove. — .

— dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. — mount – supports less disk installation. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. — eeprj – environment process.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — mscrecol. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. 522 . — print. INFORMIX variables. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. and product variables. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. — risql – EE reporting utility. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. — eemgr – system manager environment process. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. — reeprj – remote environment process. Also kills stray processes. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases. — create_db – create database process.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. This file can be edited. — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format.

dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . — eepsp. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — lessd. doc/ – directory that contains documentation.txt – EE project setup information. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.txt – less disk information. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. — dba* files – DB Access files. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files.

/usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. The files are grouped by directory. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. — remove. and clean database processes. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. problems. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. etc. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. unload drawing.def – product definition file. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — product. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. — load – processor to load the project database. These files can be modified. — menu. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file. 527 . comments.

lib – the Eden symbol library file. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product.s – help source file. Sample . This may be customized. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help. — mstr_rway. — report. You can supply additional menu files. — eden.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. — help_rway. — rway. – – seed. msseed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat – controls Eden processes. — help_rway. and any design files delivered with the product. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands.hp – help pointer file. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. 528 . — process. — mstr_rway. This may be customized. Also contains .s – master help source file.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files. function key menu. Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. and cell library. available cell libraries. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. Attaches the function bar menu.February 2003 — eden.dat – controls process management.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — rule_chk.dat – controls standard report management.dat – controls rule check report management.

_ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation. and logo. — rway.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.ace and an . The source files may be edited by the user. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library. — alias. There is an .sym – symbol file for the bar menu.msg – message file containing messages for status field. This file can be extended. 529 .msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files. — status. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — rway_prj. — rway. — command. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.pnl – panel menu source file. — prompt.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. — rwaypnl. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. — rwaybar. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. – merge_pnl – panel menu file.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.arc file for each report listed below. report/ – Contains the source (. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. The software requires this directory.bar – bar menu source file. — annot_form – form file for annotation. — rway_ref. — error.ace)and compiled (. prompting messages.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

dat rule_chk.dat print. You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file. and print.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert).dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu.Path.dat.Switch | .dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.1 0.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process. Report.Default.bat -c \ | Enter library name . respectively.dat manager. and Output..dat 13. Rule. The manager.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file..dat. eden. rule_chk. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. Rule. # # eden.Default..dat.. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. \ | Enter symbol source file . report. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process. . Report.-O.Path. and Output menus. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.dat report.%EDEN_LIB%.. You may want to write your own processes.dat process. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # 531 .dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden. ._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden.

notepad.%EDEN_LIB%...%EDEN_LIB%. \ a t | Enter symbol name . # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -e \ n | Enter library name ... # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..bat -s \ | Enter library name . \ | Merge from library name ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide ..%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%.bat -m \ | Merge into library name . # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden....bat -u \ | Enter library name .bat -C \ # | Enter library name .. d # e n # . \ | Enter symbol name .. # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. 532 .. \ \ | Enter symbol name ...%EDEN_LIB%..bat -eu \ b | Enter library name . # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden... # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor.%EDEN_LIB%... Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.bat -l \ | Enter library name .%EDEN_LIB%.February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..bat -d\ | Enter library name . # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.

# Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both). # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn... The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.%RWAY_DGN%..Switch | .1 0.exe \ | Enter design name.Path. This was # done to handle schema passwords.exe \ | Enter design name.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.-f \ | Enter envelope name. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.%RWAY_DGN%. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line. # So. The password will # have to be handled accordingly. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln.exe -s \ | Enter sheet.%RWAY_DGN%.dat #ident "@(#)data:process. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character.Default.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory. . %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet.dat 13.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 ._ _______________ Appendix G: process.Path.exe \ | Enter design name. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load.dat process. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn..exe \ | Enter one design name.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. .<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form... # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. # # process.%RWAY_DGN%.Default.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The second field is the command field.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt.February 2003 report. . # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema.Default | .cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.dat #ident "@(#)data:report.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. .Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # # They are: # Prompt. # # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.dat 7..cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema.%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.1 0.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema. # # report.) as the delimeter. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.

Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.dat rule_chk.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 .dat 13. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list..cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema..) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.1 0. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk. # The second field is the command field.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. Default | . . # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file. # # rule_chk._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. .

# (The path is not relevant). # # print. # The command can be any command to output a file.dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory. # TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.1 0...SWITCH. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt.dat 21.. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 ..path and switch.DEFAULT..0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.PATH. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter.February 2003 print. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list. # The first column of comment line must be #.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print. This field should be used to pass # information to the command. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.default.-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name.

INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database .. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Path..Default.cmd \ |Enter schema name.dat #ident "@(#)env:manager. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.dat 21..1 0.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory... # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. . # # manager.Default.) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt.INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol. _ # Any of the sub-fields r the third field can be omitted in p # t # . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat manager. .. -s e # # m #Compress database .Switch | . G: Customizing Environment 537 .Path.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ | Enter x schema name._ _______________ Appendix G: manager.

February 2003 538 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond. For example. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name.cmd file Appendix H alias.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command. You do not need to add entries to the alias.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias.cmd file. The example in the alias. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign.cmd.cmd file. The alias.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. If you were to add this example to the alias. a sample entry. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element.1 0._ _______________ Appendix H: alias. the format of such an entry. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique.cmd file.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 . You can use any text editor to modify the file. H: alias. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. The alias. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element.

February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

cmd file H: alias.cmd file 541 ._ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.

February 2003 542 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.cmd Appendix I rway. If you do not want the rway.amm m.cmds 543 ._ _______________ Appendix I: rway.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user.ammfile. add mmenus ee_rway:menu. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment.. The rway.pr I: rway.cmd file to be executed.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m.cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway..cmd The file rway.cmd file may also be edited by the user.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Created through DB Access. Report templates created through DB Access.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. is supported. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library.._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. both. layout. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access.e. i. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). the reference database and. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. and print conditions. Project Dataview. The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library. This is the name of any current RIS schema. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide. the Project Data View Reference Guide. either local or remote. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . Any RISsupported relational database. in some cases. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports.. Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide.

) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed. If you wish to override this name.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded. etc. They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema".. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0". second.. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name.[wtr_p5] When you create a template..) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through. and use a schema from the schema list.) 546 . * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access.. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5).") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0].. third. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i..e.rpt" added to the end. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. Certain variables may be exported. and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used. the "-o" option can be used. Thus.. etc._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>. with a ". Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". "select value_a from table_b where. default file name that they write to.

sheet. found in $EE_NUC/bin. J: Reports 547 . 3. Selects the desired columns from those tables. drawing_type. Formats information into readable form._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. load_date. and sorts them by sheet name. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. dba_rpt .a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. 2. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ref_db. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. Information Output: Drawing. Project Database drwlst (RIS) . filename.the RIS process.sheet Associated Software/Files 1.

3.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_tl_type.February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. description Fitting. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_ol_type. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. found in $EE_NUC/bin. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Selects the desired columns from those tables. dba_rpt . 548 . ee_tl_subtype. ee_out_width.the RIS process. 2. Information Output: System. ee_part. system_name Straight. ee_out_width._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Formats information into readable form. Project Database mto_rpt . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1.

2. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. Formats information into readable form. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_ht_diam. J: Reports 549 . found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_out_width. ee_out_ht_diam. description Fitting. ee_tl_length.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_tl_subtype. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. ee_tl_type._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. 3. ee_part. ee_out_width.the RIS process. ee_ol_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template. Information Output: Straight. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. ee_ol_type. Project Database rway_bom . dba_rpt .

234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. 550 . The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. For instance. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form.

ee_part. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_out_width.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_type. Project Database rway_bom_vol . found in $EE_NUC/bin. 2.the RIS process. This file: Selects the desired database tables. J: Reports 551 . ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. 3. ee_ol_type. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_tl_subtype. description Fitting. ee_ol_type. dba_rpt . Formats information into readable form.

ee_out_ht_diam. ee_out_width. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_length.the RIS process. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. system_name Straight. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. Project Database blank_ids . found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_part. ee_ol_type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Formats information into readable form. 2. ee_tl_subtype. dba_rpt . 552 . and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. ee_ol_type. 3.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. description Fitting.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. ee_tl_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Information Output: System. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_width.

When you select Reset. RIS Schema Manager terminates. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. If you select any of the buttons. and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. then information about that schema is displayed. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. and dropping RIS schemas. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. If you select one of the schemas in the list. It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. any active secondary forms are erased. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. changing. When you select Cancel (X). 553 .

with the exception of the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form.February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. 554 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. a read only form. It reads information about existing schemas.

If the selected database type requires additional information. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. Once you have entered all necessary information. select one of the Network Protocol fields. 2. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. input fields for that information display. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. 3. If you select one of the databases. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. Key in all information in the input fields. select Run to create the schema. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. Select the Display Databases button. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. This form creates new RIS schemas. 555 ._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter.

When you have entered all necessary information. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. To modify the schema node._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. When you select one of these options. To modify the user password. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. and the schema node. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. you need only to enter the new password. the user password. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. To select a schema to drop. only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. Selecting Run drops the schema. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. 556 . To select the schema to be altered. select Run to alter the schema.

The column position. column type. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. This form consists of a list of all the tables. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. Drop Table. column name. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. and clears the list. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. If the selected schema requires a password. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager. and Alter Table) will accept input. 557 . views.

Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. select Run to create the table. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. Then there is the second set. In Modify Column Mode. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. Once the table definition is complete. 558 . This form has two sets of Control buttons. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. Drop Column. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. Select Reset to clear the form. in the upper right corner of the form. In Drop Column Mode. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. which behaves as expected. new columns can be added to the table definition. If a column is chosen in the table definition list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. In Insert Column Mode. There is the usual set. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. columns can be dropped from the table definition. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. column definitions can be modified. and Modify Column.

select Run to alter the table. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. K: RIS Schema Mgr. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Run drops the table. 559 . The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. It can only append one new column to an existing table. Selecting Reset clears the form. Once the new column is defined. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form.

Selecting Reset clears the form. it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Additionally. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. 560 . an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. Selecting Reset clears the form settings.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.

The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. In these cases. Currently supported values are X for XNS. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. A line separates entries. O for Oracle. This file is the schema lock file. and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. T for TCP/IP. a unique key to identify the database The database type.LCK extension. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. If the filename is not a full pathname. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . If there is no network address given.2 The network address (must be an address. L for LU6. the lock file must be replaced manually. currently supported values are X for Informix. The values found in the create schema option clause. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. I for Ingres. the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. D for DNP (DECnet). Although you can use multiple files. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. If the lock file does not exist. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. then the schema file is in use. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies.

The valid value is lu6. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .135.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses. the other on the IBM.142. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. This value is case-sensitive.2.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129. There are two logical units.135. the CICS transaction name.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. This value is case-sensitive.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users. one on the Clipper. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. This value is case-sensitive. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed. This value is case-sensitive. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. This value is case-sensitive.142.2 and the default value is lu6.

If the file is corrupted or removed. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements.H:._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8. only the first protocol in the list will be used. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. 563 . This allows for additional protocols in the future.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. Currently.

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . To run EE Manager. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file. Once you have successfully entered your password. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. see Appendix N. For detailed information on setting environment variables. if you are entering the environment for the first time._ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system.

It uses DB Access to query and edit tables. In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and update rows. 566 .February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. delete rows.

The number on the button changes to reflect the row. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. delete. this command finds all rows in the current table. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library. which allow you to search the database. or edit the value displayed in the field. which shows the current find criteria. Release the mouse button to display the row. 567 . A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. and insert a row or group of rows. To go directly to a certain row. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. These buttons include various Query functions. If no find criteria exist. and functions which enable you to change. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics.February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. 568 . you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. By default. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. When you select Update Active. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. and Update Active fields. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. As long as this command is active. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). Add Query columns. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. When you are certain the data is correct. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. Multiple column searches are processed in order. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database.

_ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification. Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 570 .

Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform.cfg file to the list. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form.cfg file. N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.cfg is located. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. 571 .

The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. 4. 572 . appears in the Descrip field. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field.cfg file. The description. continue the same process as above. 2. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. 8._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. Steps 1. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. To edit the values of other variables. Double click on the EE Configure icon. This same field can be used to add a new variable. if any.cfg file. Click on the Set button to accept the new value. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. 6. When complete. To delete the variable. 7. 3. 5. click on the Delete button. Edit the entry in the Value field.

Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. Software designed to meet specific needs. NFS. character client column command confirm button 573 . A group of columns defines a table in a database. An attribute of a database table. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. and the keyboard. it controls the message fields. In network operations. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). A queue._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. and then manipulated as individual elements. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. See also path name and relative path name. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. created through NQS. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. the menus. All network operations (database. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. unlike system software which runs other software. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. or channel for moving requests. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field.

coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder.0. A separating mark or space. illegal instructions. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. destroy. Normally.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. the most common of which are memory violations. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. whereby points are located by traversing the X.0. though this is not required. or erase. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. A nonaddressable component of a network. Y. interpreted. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. identify and accept elements. tape drive. or Z axis. For example. and user-generated quit signals. place elements. that is. for example. Y. and Z axes of the design cube. and to select commands from forms and menus. To remove. a component onto which a user cannot log. Also known as key-in field. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. to accept previously selected elements. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. or processed by a specific program. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. disk drive. eliminate._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. bus errors. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. and floppy disk. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system.

The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. difference in longitude. a field. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. or a checklist. or positive. A relational database management system supported by RIS. See also relative path name. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . drawing. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. including the file name._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. such as a button. a relational database table. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. An object (project. A pictorial representation or image. When selected. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives.) of interest about which information is stored. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. a list of the data available for that field is displayed. element. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. See interference envelope. that responds to information. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. and so forth. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east.

or alias. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. to which you can snap. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. and the Key-in field. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. the Current Command field. It is divided into the Command Status field.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. A name. including vertices. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. or it can mean the connected system. Network File System. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. the Prompt field. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . Also known as a data entry field. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. A graphic representation or schema. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. A point on an element. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system.

and z-axes intersect. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. The sequence of directories leading to a file. In coordinate geometry. A relational database management system supported by RIS. job specifications. having no elevations or depressions. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. y. vendor’s catalog data._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. to change the angular orientation. Reference Database. report formats and other information of a similar manner. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. or indicate a specific point in the design file. Network Queuing System. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. To turn. the point where the x. and is three-dimensional. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. See also absolute path name and relative path name. graphics symbology. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. See also path name and absolute path name. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. label descriptions. but is level. commodity libraries.

All network operations (database. the software can perform processing more quickly. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. The display style of an element. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. style. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. Data. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. See also active depth. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data.z). The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 .y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. Language developed by IBM for creating. NFS._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and z axes. that are stored in an attribute. A collection of data for quick reference. The software uses virtual memory to store data. and so forth. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. To switch. solid. dash-dot. and querying relational databases. to change between two alternatives.y. Views are created with their own x. stay on the disk until they are called for. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. One collection of column values for a table. generally represented as a line.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. This means that unneeded files and data. and weight. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. either entered by the user or determined by the software. including color. A name that provides access to an account on the system. modifying. y. The x. In network operations. The defined area of vision on a screen.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 580 .

109. 234 list column 179. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27.cmd 529. 234 override button 180. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 327. 235 source column 179. 415. 234 select button 180. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 234. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72. 234 by group 233 clear button 180. 550 bin/ 521._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 235 override keys 179. 235 display toggle 179.

276 model 271 library 269. 275. 278. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 279 equipment pointer 274._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277.msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 .

275. 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 279 equipment pointer 274. 522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 527 database 321. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 278. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 .

279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 278. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277.dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 .February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179.

cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274. 84. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 86. 81._ _______________ ee. 78. 79. 83.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 87. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 80.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 275. 82. 276 keys 431 place 144 error.

567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323.hp 528 help_rway.February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 234. 357. 342. 264. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 359. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269. 271 eden symbol 353. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 .

sh 522 msg/ 523.cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol._ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 . 234. 235 keys 115. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46.hp 528 mstr_rway. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180.dgn 528 mstr_rway.February 2003 msseed. 179. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 48.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178. 52.

msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 55.def 521. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157. 297 sketch 113. 567 process._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 527 product.dat 528.dat 522. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 . 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521.

327.sym 529 rway_prj.tbl 529 rway_ref. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar.dat 528.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report.dat 528.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk. 534 reports 117. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.sym 529 rway.cmd file 543 rway. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.

449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27.msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 ._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428.

109. 415. 449 project 52. 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 .February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 48. 52. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 .unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 55. 449 reference 55. 55 processing 53.

550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109._ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 327. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 .

February 2003 594 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.02.

..................................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element....2)............. 617 Rotate Group...................................................... 613 Mirror Copy Element.............................................. 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................4).......................................................................................................3) ............................................................ 598 Load Reference Schema ............................................................................................................ 634 EE Raceway File Structure.......................................................................................................................................................................... 637 596 ............................2) ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 627 Annotate Model..... 597 Modeling........................................................................................... 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16.................................. 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9.........................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment .................. 621 Mirror Group ................................................................................ 619 Rotate Copy Group ...... 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ................................................................... 611 Mirror Element ......................................................................................................... 623 Mirror Copy Group.... 607 Rotate Element.................................................................................. 599 Utilities ...................................................................................... 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9............................................................................................ 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5..................................... 625 Move Group.................................................... 633 EE Nucleus File Structure ...................................................................

597 . EDEN symbols. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. reporting. Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. the EE Raceway Environment form displays.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. and rule checks.

Select a design area from the list. 3. The selected model displays in MicroStation. Select a model from the list. 598 . Click Accept. 4. The Raceway Designer form displays. Click Accept. 2. Steps 1.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment.

SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which . — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.unl files that are listed in the . If you update the schema with a .cmd files.unl files to load into which tables. the process loads it only if the table is empty. 599 . SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. If a table lacks a unique index. or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given . keeping column data where column names match.sql file. — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the .sql file. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the .sql file.sql file. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.sql file that has a different structure from the original .Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition.

unl files to load into which tables. CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which . 600 .unl files to load into which tables.

EDEN. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. and Rule commands.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. 601 . These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Report. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command.

You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. Mirror. 602 .1 version of the document). EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. Rotate Copy. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. The following information has been modified: Rotate. and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

603 . This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Palette. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window.

then selecting Palette from the resulting menu. 604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window.

Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. then selecting Modify Group Commands.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. 605 . You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.

606 . Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette.

Mirror. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. including RCPs. annotation.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. Annotate Element — Places. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. and delete specified elements. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file.1 version of the document). You can use individual commands to move. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. and so forth). within the design file. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. onelines. The following information has been modified: Rotate. and three-lines. to review or edit element annotation. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. three-lines. Rotate Copy. 607 . then selecting Palette. copy. then selecting Modify Element Commands.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. reviews.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. from the design file. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. and elements associated with it. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. 608 . Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element.

You can use this command to move one-lines. you can locate elements. RCPs. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. All associated annotation. equipment pointers. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. 609 . The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. If an RCP is rotated. three-line fittings. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. For detailed information about precision input. reject input. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If a one-line is rotated. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. To change the angle. accept input. drop points. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. All associated annotation. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. and annotation. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. route one-lines. three-line fittings. reset a command action.

610 . 4. The system highlights the specified element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. 2. the system displays the message Element not found. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The element rotates to the specified position. The Specify Rotation form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Rotate Element command. Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. 5. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element.

Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Using the form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. 611 . Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and exit a command. reset a command action. route one-lines. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. To change the angle. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. reject input.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. accept input. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements.

Select the Rotate Copy Element command. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. The element copy displays at the specified position. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The Specify Rotation form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. the system displays the message Element not found. The system highlights the specified element. 612 . Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 5. 3. 2. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays. 4.

accept input. equipment pointers. select the field and type a new angle. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. You can use this command to mirror one-lines.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. Using the form. three-line fittings. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. reject input. All associated annotation. If a one-line is mirrored. For detailed information about precision input. To change the displayed axis. and equipment pointers will also be moved. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. toggle among the three axes (Primary. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. To reset a 613 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. To change the displayed angle. RCPs. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. All associated annotation. At any point during this operating sequence. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. reset a command action. route one-lines. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and annotation. If an RCP is rotated. you can locate elements. and exit a command. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. three-line fittings. Secondary. drop points.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. The element rotates to the specified position. 2. 3. 4. Click Accept. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 5. The system highlights the specified element. Select the Mirror Element command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. Steps 1. 614 . Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. The Mirror Element precision input form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Orient Mirror form displays. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. the system displays the message Element not found.

To change the displayed angle. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. you can locate elements. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. see Precision Input Form. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. route one-lines. 615 . Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. reset a command action. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. accept input.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. reject input. Secondary. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. select the field and type a new angle. toggle among the three axes (Primary. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. Steps 1. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. At any point during this operating sequence. To change the displayed axis.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 616 . The element copy displays at the specified position. The system highlights the specified element. Click Accept. Specify the point around which to mirror the element. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Orient Mirror form displays. 3. Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. 4.

The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Mirror. You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. copy.1 version of the document). and delete elements of specified groups. three-lines. The following information has been modified: Rotate. then selecting Palette. 617 . You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. annotation. and Move Group commands See the following text for details.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. Mirror Copy. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and so forth). and to review or edit element annotation. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Rotate Copy.

reviews. Annotate Element by Group — Places. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. 618 . Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.

route one-lines. reject input. reset a command action. drop points. You can use this command to move one-lines. three-line fittings. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and annotation. RCPs. and exit a command. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. All associated annotation. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. and equipment pointers will also be moved. 619 . East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. If a one-line is rotated. accept input. To change the angle. All associated annotation. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. see Precision Input Form. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. If an RCP is rotated. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. you can locate elements. three-line fittings. equipment pointers. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. For detailed information about precision input.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. For groups in Single Element mode. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 2. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3. The Specify Rotation form displays. The Rotate Group precision input form displays. The system highlights the specified group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 620 . 4. 5. the system displays the message Group not found. Steps 1. The group rotates to the specified position. Select the Rotate Group command. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Click Accept.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. and exit a command. To change the angle. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. For detailed information about precision input. 621 . Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. accept input. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. you can locate elements. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. reject input. see Precision Input Form.

622 . you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. The system highlights the specified group. The group copy displays at the specified position. Click Accept. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The Specify Rotation form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 2. the system displays the message Group not found. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 4. For groups in Single Element mode. 3. 5.

you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. All associated annotation. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. Using the form. reset a command action. and equipment pointers will also be moved. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. select the field and type a new angle. If one-lines are mirrored. three-line fittings. All associated annotation. accept input. toggle among the three axes (Primary. For detailed information about precision input. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. three-line fittings. route one-lines. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. Secondary. see Precision Input Form.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. To change the displayed axis. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. To reset a 623 . the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. If an RCP is rotated. and exit a command.

The Mirror Group precision input form displays. Select the Mirror Group command. Click Accept. 624 . Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. 3. The Orient Mirror form displays. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. The group moves to the specified position. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. 5. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the system displays the message Group not found. 2. For groups in Single Element mode. The system highlights the specified group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Specify the point about which to mirror the group. 4. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. To change the displayed angle.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Using the form. select the field and type a new angle. 625 . Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed axis. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. toggle among the three axes (Primary. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Secondary. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reject input. accept input. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. you can locate elements. route one-lines. and exit a command.

The group copy displays at the specified position. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. If you do not locate an acceptable group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 626 . Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. Click Accept. For groups in Single Element mode. 3. 4. Specify the point around which to mirror the group. The system highlights the specified group. the system displays the message Group not found. The Orient Mirror form displays. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>.

reject input. 627 . 4. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Move Group precision input form displays. Select the Move Group command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 2. Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. reset a command action.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. accept input. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. route one-lines. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The group moves to the specified position. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. and exit a command. the system displays the message Group not found. The system highlights the specified group. Using the form. 3. see Precision Input Form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input.

2.dgn file name of the raceway model.1 version of the document). —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. If you toggled Display to On. will prevent such duplication. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. If the user does not specify a sheet number. The Annotate Element form displays. the sheet number is automatically set to match the .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. 285 in the PDS 7. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. 4. Select the Annotate Model command. however. The Load Database process. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. 628 . The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. Steps 1. 3. If you want to display the annotation in the model.

click Attach.1 version of the document). then. click Attach. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. then. Snap. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. The following information has been modified: Display.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. 629 .2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file.

or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Snap. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. 630 . You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. Snap. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. PROJECT_LOCATION.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. Before running the upgrade utility. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database.EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7.exe file See the following text for details. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. pds_north. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 .1 version of the document). it is necessary to use the ee72upg. Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7. and EE_SCHEMA.2.

ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). 632 . ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment.

the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/. • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. 633 .1 version of the document). By default.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. It identifies those files you can modify.

The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory. The product may reside on any file system. The following files exist under the ..

— dba_rpt – DBAccess report process.txt – File containing release notices. — remove. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. and EE Raceway.txt– copyright notice file. eenuc — readme.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt.\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. 635 .exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. INFORMIX. EE Nucleus. — create_db – create database process. and then invokes the EE environment. The files are grouped by directory. — dba_shell. — EEnotice. problems.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. comments. — license.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes. etc. — . — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation.

cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database. 636 . db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). — print. forms – directory that contains all the environment forms.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — manager.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files. — Eemgr. doc – directory that contains documentation.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — dba* files – DB Access files. — eeprj.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — eeqpr. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server.exe – environment process. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — mscrecol. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — reeprj – remote environment process. — menu_shel.

\eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway.

638 . The files are grouped by directory.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. etc. comments. problems. eerway — readme.

— eden.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet.dat – controls rule check report management. Also contains . 639 . db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. and clean database processes.dat – controls standard report management. — report. dgn – Contains the seed file directory. These files can be modified. — load – processor to load the project database. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. — rule_chk. and any design files delivered with the product. — process. — rway_schma.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema.dat – controls process management. Sample . available cell libraries.dat – controls Eden processes.— remove. unload drawing. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product.

dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view. 640 .

— msseed. This file can be extended. This may be customized. — eden. — error. 641 .dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. — alias. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. This may be customized. — seed.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.lib – the Eden symbol library file. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — command.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. eden – contains the Eden symbol library.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field.— seed – contains the available seed design files. — prompt.

— rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. report – Contains the source (. The source files may be edited by the user. and logo.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. 642 .arc file for each report listed below.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. The software requires this directory.msg – message file containing messages for status field. There is an . This directory also contains the available precision input forms. — rwaypnl. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus.ace)and compiled (. — rwaybar. — status.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. tmp – Holds any temporary files.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables.ace and an . These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. prompting messages. — rway_ref.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.

605 EE Raceway. 612 file structure EE. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 626 modify. 602 EERway. 618 move. 610. 634 EE Nucleus. 601 643 . 602 Intergrated Commands. 607 setup. 614 Mirror Group command. 624 mirror copy. 622 Rotate Element command. 606. 628 palettes bar commands. 618 runtime setup. 626 Mirror Element command. 624 model annotate. 638 element mirror.Index annotate model. 634 Nucleus file structure. 608 modify group. 616 modify. 638 group mirror. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 629 Annotate Model command. 606 PDS reference model. 620 rotate copy. 608 Modify Group commands. 602 model commands. 604 design. 618 Move Group command. 635 EE Raceway. 607 modify. 630 reference schema load. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 629 EE file structure. 604. 608 rotate copy. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 599 utilities. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 628 rotate. 620 schema load reference. 629 Modify Element commands. 614 mirror copy. 605 modify element. 610 Rotate Group command. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 635 Raceway file structure. 630 Reference PDS Model command.

** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005C.03.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200005D For PDS version 07. .00.

.........646 Using the Integrated Commands ...........................................................................647 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16............648 Area Volume Graphics..650 Appendix A Error Messages.................2)..........................................................................................................................................................................................................652 645 ...........................................................Table of Contents Integrated Commands (replaces 16) ................................

and view the area volume graphics for clash and design areas. Note: The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS. The following information has been modified: Area Volume Graphics command See the following text for details. display information about the reference models attached to the current model. • The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules. not when running standalone EE Raceway. 646 . review the PDS clashes in a model. The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar.1 version of the document). create a window containing a specific element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Integrated Commands (replaces 16) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 369-370 in the PDS 7. then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes. providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines.

Using the Integrated Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Area Volume Graphics – You must turn Construction Graphics on in MicroStation. 647 . you can use these commands throughout the design session. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. Before Using These Commands Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. and must have an existing clash in the design area. See the command description for more details.

then. See the following text for details. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. The following information has been modified: Added default value for Sparse/Propagated toggle. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. click Attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 629-630 in the PDS 7. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach. The default value for this toggle is Propagated. 648 . click Attach. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach.2 version of the document). The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. then. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area.

You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. Snap. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. 649 . Snap. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model.Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display.

Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. Add/Revise Graphics – Adds design area volume graphics to the model. Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment. Raceway. Raceway. To add graphics. For the Drawing Graphics environment. Remove Graphics . Commands Place Diagonal Lines .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the model so that you can see their location. In addition. you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. PE_HVAC. and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables.Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier identification in the model. click Add/Revise Graphics. Update Graphics . Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology.Highlights the area in the model. PE_HVAC. the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping.Removes the selected area from the model. Equipment. 650 . you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator. and FrameWorks Plus environments. Hilite Graphics . You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B. double-click the desired discipline. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed. and double-click the desired area name.

Show – Displays all the design areas attached to the model. Can be used to exit any of the other commands on this dialog box at any stage. 651 . Exit .Closes the dialog box and exits the command.

Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. • This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. <string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load.1 version of the document). The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible. The following information has been modified: Changed color range from 0-127 to 0-255 in Color error message.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Appendix A Error Messages Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 377-414 in the PDS 7. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. 652 . fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. See the following text for details. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique.

straight connected to invalid system! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Change element annotation. Asid <numeric value>. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>.Asid <numeric value>. Asid:<numeric value> <string> 653 . Asid <numeric value>. <string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. If the fitting is a specification-driven part. Recovery: Change element annotation. raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors.

Cannot Place Cross Section. or ". 654 . Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege. when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: None. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. and replace the one-line. Cannot Place Cross Section. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. call Intergraph support. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden. If the problem persists. Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. "$". Recovery: The program will restore the original text. digits. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted.". Invalid sys on oneline. Invalid olt on oneline.

Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Recovery: None. If the problem persists. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255.Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. and replace the one-line. Color not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Recovery: Key in another cell name. Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. call Intergraph support. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation.ins is not in the proper location. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command. 655 . Recovery: Contact Intergraph support.

Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. Could not get one line type from user data. Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. 656 . Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not get one line type part table from user data. based on cause of error. Please export this variable. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: There are various recoveries.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP.

Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> 657 . Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a oneline.Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Recovery: None. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. Could not write to TCB. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Recovery: None. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file.

Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. 658 . or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: Enter design filename. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. If the key does not exist. Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. insert it into the reference database. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. change the spec. Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Enter correct filename. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form.

Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Recovery: Enter a new asid number.Recovery: None. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. 659 . Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Recovery: Enter a new value. Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid. Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>.

Error closing propagation log file. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file. Reason: File pro. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database.err did not close properly. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema. Propagation status may not be recorded.err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! 660 . Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege.

Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table. Recovery: Correct entry. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found. Reason: Internal error.EErc file. Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table.Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error in graphic bang placement. Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Error loading one-lines! 661 .

Recovery: Add privilege to database. and one element. Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. Recovery: Add privilege to database. one datum point. Recovery: Add columns and try again. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. 662 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database.

Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again.sql file. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line. Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. 663 . Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted.Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref.sql file.

Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Recovery: Edit the sheet name. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Add privileges to database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list. 664 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema.Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. Recovery: Add privilege. Error saving symbology . Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog.

Reason: Internal error. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Recovery: None. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. The process creates a zero-length envelope.Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. 665 . Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Recovery: Add privilege to database. File <string> exists. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring. Recovery: Key in a value. Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Recovery: Fix other errors. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. Recovery: Call Intergraph support.

Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. a form could not be displayed by the software. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. 666 . Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. at a cross. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Reason: An illegal angle exists. extension or transition of the fitting. Recovery: Fatal error. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. Try to exit and re-enter the software. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. For example. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created. Possible memory allocation problem. change the spec.

Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error.Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. 667 . Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH./config/assign file. Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group.

Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. <numeric value>. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected. Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range. Recovery: Key in another asid id. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. For example. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. 668 .

Recovery: Enter an integer value. Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). vertex <numeric value>. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Recovery: Key in another value. quantity must be an integer greater than 0.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. For example. Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>.Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database. If it is a cable entry. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database. Invalid key in . Invalid RCP . Invalid real number: <string> 669 . Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer. Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database.

Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. 670 . Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Fix other problems. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Recovery: Enter a valid response.

Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed.or RB in the justification field. Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. CT. CC. Must be LT. Recovery: Enter LT. LC. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. Recovery: Delete all but one title block.. LB. CB. 671 ..Max run angle = <numeric value>. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file. or RB. Reason: Invalid text justification entered. . Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name. LC. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. RT. and place the element or RCP. RC.

No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. Reason: The cross section must be of type A. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. C for the cross section type. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. B. No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. Recovery: Key in another name. or C in the active specification.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database. 672 .cel). B. Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname. No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product.

No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. Recovery: Populate the database with parts.Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid special parts exist for this table 673 . No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. Recovery: Populate the database. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file. No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file.

Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined. Recovery: Populate the database. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. 674 . Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Select another option.

Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Select failed. title block.Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. Recovery: None. no rows found fitting the given criteria 675 . Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. three-line. Recovery: Enter schema name. Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. RCP).

Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style.Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. cannot be edited. therefore. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Recovery: Change sheet name. Recovery: Enter sheet name. Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Title block placed . Recovery: Specify new find criteria. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. 676 . Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory.unl file or inserting a row through SQL. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero.

Recovery: Add privileges to the database.Recovery: None. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell. Recovery: If necessary. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. Warning Column <string> found in reference. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. snap to the angle. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table. 677 . Recovery: Change the title block annotation. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees.

/config/assign file and that its value is a full path. you must key in a group name./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004 Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. 678 . Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form.

........................................... 648 volume graphics displaying ....................................................Index Area Volume Graphics command .............648 PDS reference model ..............................................650 Reference PDS Model .............652 integrated commands....................................................................646 Area Volume Graphics ................. 648 Reference PDS Model command................... 650 679 ..650 error messages .....